ELECTRIC ACTUATORS

for industrial applications and civil vessels

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION 2022

BASIC RANGE
ED 25 – ED 50 / EQ 60 – EQ 600
SMART RANGE
PF-M25 – PF-M100
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1
SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5
SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Manual
Technical documentation
1st edition 2022

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made.

Please refer to our website: www.auma.com to access

the individual documents included in this folder.
Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.
Table of contents

1 Technical data Actuators 5

Basic Range 6
Smart Range 11

2 Technical data Miscellaneous 65

Connectors 66
Corrosion protection 68
Painting specifications 77
Lubricants 81

3 Electrical data Actuators 87

Basic Range 88
Smart Range 99

4 Dimensions Actuators 105

Basic Range 106
Smart Range 113

5 Dimensions Output drive types 121

Couplings 124

6 Spare parts lists 131

Smart Range 132

7 Wiring diagrams 149

Basic Range 150
Smart Range 156
 1. Technical data
Actuators
1 Technical data Actuators

Basic Range 6

for open-close and modulating duty

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600 6

Smart Range 11

for open-close and modulating duty

PF-M25 – PF-M100 11
PF-M25 – PF-M100 Profibus DP 16
PF-M25 – PF-M100 Modbus RTU 21

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 27
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 Profibus DP 31
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 Modbus RTU 36

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1 41

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1 Profibus DP 45
SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1 Modbus RTU 49

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5 53

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5 Profibus DP 57
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5 Modbus RTU 61
ED 25 – ED 50

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

General information
Part-turn actuators for controlling and automating final elements within the field of process engineering with part-turn movements between 90°
and 180° for e.g. butterfly valves and ball valves.

Type Torque range Operating time for 90° Motor protection1) Valve attachment Weight
in seconds
Open-close duty Modulating duty
Min. Max. Example Standard approx.
[Nm] [Nm] AC 50 Hz AC 60 Hz2) DC3) 230 V AC EN ISO 5211 [kg]
15 12 6 B
F03, (F04)4), F05,
ED 25 25 25 30 25 10 B 4.0
F07
70 59 18 B
15 12 7 T
F03, (F04)4), F05,
ED 50 50 50 30 25 10 B 4.0
F07
70 59 18 B

1) B = Stall-proof motor (S1 - 100 %), T = thermoswitch for temperature monitoring

2) Power consumption is increased by 20 % compared to the 50 Hz AC variant
3) For DC, the operating time is reduced with increasing load. The indicated operating time is valid for no load
4) Offset by 45°, F12 on request

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, class A
duty:
Modulating Intermittent duty S3 - 50 %, S4 - 50 % or S1 - 100 % with maximum number of starts of 1,200
duty: starts per hour. Specific data for the respective model, refer to electrical data.
Intermittent duty S1 - 100 % with maximum number of starts of up to 1,200 starts per hour;
not available for all versions (option)
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at run or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Synchronous motor
Mains voltage, mains frequency Standard voltages:

1-phase AC
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 230 220
Hz 50 60

Options:

3-phase AC 1-phase AC DC current

Voltages/frequencies Voltages/frequencies Voltage
Volt 380 400 400 440 24 24 115 110 24
Hz 50 50 60 60 50 60 50 60 –

Further voltages on request

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %
Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
Insulation class E, B, F
Motor protection Without torque switches and, therefore, without motor protection as standard.
Heater (option) Heating resistor with thermoswitch against moisture with autonomous temperature control, max. 15 W,
supply voltage 24, 115, 230 V/50/60 [HZ/WP]
Self-locking Yes
Swing angle 90°, 120°, 150°, 180°
Manual operation Emergency manual operation with hexagon socket
Electrical connection Internal terminal rail, for terminal assignment refer to terminal plan
Cable entry 2 blanking plugs M16 x 1.5
Hood Standard: Polycarbonate (flammability class V0)
Options: Aluminium with indicator glass

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.207/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 1/2

ED 25 – ED 50

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator controls

Limit switching and digital outputs Standard: 2 switches for limit seating in the end positions. Used to set the limit positions for the end
positions.
Options: ● Additional limit switches for signalling the end positions or intermediate positions, freely
adjustable max. 250 V AC, max. 10 A (resistive load), max. 5 A (inductive load), max. 2
switches [2WE]
● Additional limit switches for signalling the end positions or intermediate positions, freely
adjustable with gold-plated contacts for low voltage, max. 30 V AC, max. 0.1 A (resistive
load), max. 2 switches [2WE-G]
Digital inputs Standard: None
Options: With 2 inputs (reversing contactors) for OPEN and CLOSE, option for:
● 24 V DC; 1,7 W appropriate for PLC [WSE]
● 24 V AC/DC
● 110 V AC
● 230 V AC
Positioner (option) Positioning electronics for actuator control [PEL100, PEL-GL]
Input 0 – 10 V, 0/4 – 20 mA, output 0 – 10 V, 0/4 – 20 mA
Position feedback signal, analogue ● Potentiometer 100/130/200/500/1 000/5 000 Ωor 10 kΩ [POT]
(options) Linearity fault ≦0.5 %, max. 1.5 W, wiper current 30 mA, max. 2 units
● Electronic position feedback signal 2/3-wire technology [ESR100]
Output 0/4 – 20 mA, connecting voltage 24 V DC

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position, but not suspended downward
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2,000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature Standard: 0 °C to +60 °C with options (a.o. electronic sub-assembly)
0 °C to +50 °C with positioner option (PEL)
Option: –20 °C to +60 °C (heater required)
Enclosure protection according to EN Standard: IP67
60529 IP65 for versions with local controls, FSC module or transformer
Option: IP68 (version with larger output drive unit and valve attachment F05/F07/F10)
According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
Explosion-protection (option) Ex II 3D IP65 T 150°C Dc [A-Ex]
Corrosion protection C2 according to EN ISO 12944-2
Coating Powder coating
Colour AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Lifetime AUMA part-turn actuators meet or exceed the lifetime requirements of EN 15714-2. Detailed information
can be provided on request.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.207/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 2/2

EQ 40 – EQ 600

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

General information
Part-turn actuators for controlling and automating final elements within the field of process engineering with part-turn movements between 90°
and 180° for e.g. butterfly valves and ball valves.

Type Torque range Operating time for Motor protec- Valve attach- Handwheel Weight
90° in seconds tion1) ment2)
Open-close Modulating
duty duty
Min. Max. Example Standard Ø approx.
[Nm] [Nm] AC 50 Hz AC 60 Hz3) DC4) 230 V AC EN ISO 5211 [mm] [kg]
15 12 14 B
(F04)5), F05,
EQ 40 40 20 30 25 22 B 100 7.5
F07, F10
60 50 45 B
20 16 14 T
(F04)5), F05,
EQ 60 60 40 30 25 22 T 100 7.5
F07, F10
60 50 45 B
206) 16 14 B
(F04)5), F05,
EQ 100 100 60 30 25 22 T 100 7.5
F07, F10
60 50 45 T
206) 16 14 T
(F04)5), F05,
EQ 150 150 80 306) 25 22 B 100 7.5
F07, F10
60 50 45 T
406) 33 38 T
F07, F10,
EQ 300 300 180 806) 66 70 B 100 15
(F12)5)
160 133 140 T
806) 66 75 T F07, F10,
EQ 600 600 300 100 15
1606) 133 115 B (F12)5)

1) B = Stall-proof motor (S1 - 100 %), T = thermoswitch for temperature monitoring

2) EQ 40 – EQ 150: For variants with couplings at higher diameter, IP68 and with base and lever, a larger output drive unit is used with combined flange
F05/F07/F10.
3) Power consumption is increased by 20 % compared to the 50 Hz AC variant
4) For DC, the operating time is reduced with increasing load. The indicated operating time is valid for no load
5) Offset by 45°, F12 on request
6) With positioner option, the metallic hood is required

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, class A
duty:
Modulating Intermittent duty S3 - 50 %, S4 - 50 % or S1 - 100 % with maximum number of starts of 1,200
duty: starts per hour. Specific data for the respective model, refer to electrical data.
Intermittent duty S1 - 100 % with maximum number of starts of up to 1,200 starts per hour;
not available for all versions (option)
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at run or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Synchronous motor
Mains voltage, mains frequency Standard voltages:

1-phase AC
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 230 220
Hz 50 60

Options:

3-phase AC 1-phase AC DC current

Voltages/frequencies Voltages/frequencies Voltage
Volt 380 400 400 440 24 24 115 110 24
Hz 50 50 60 60 50 60 50 60 –

Further voltages on request

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %
Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y006.637/003/en Issue 2.20 Page 1/3

EQ 40 – EQ 600

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator

Insulation class E, B, F
Motor protection The motor shall by protected by correct switching off at maximum torque. Motors for operation of S1 - 100%
operation on are stall-proof and offer additional protection. For all other motors, an additional protection for
temperature monitoring can be provided using integrated thermoswitches. For AC motors only. Not provided
for DC motors. There are two types of thermoswitches: either the motor is automatically switched off, or a
switch signal is lead outside for customer connection. The type to be used depends on the motor version
and cannot be freely selected. For details, refer to Electrical data or in the order-related documents.
Heater (option) Heating resistor with thermoswitch against moisture with autonomous temperature control, max. 15 W,
supply voltage 24, 115, 230 V/50/60 [HZ/WP]
Self-locking Yes
Swing angle (option) Standard: 90° ±15°
Options: 120° ±15°
[SWE] 150° ±15°
180° ±15°
Manual operation Handwheel
End positions Mechanical end stops, adjustable from outside
Electrical connection Standard: Internal terminal rail, for terminal assignment refer to terminal plan
Options: ● Separate electrical terminal compartment at actuator with 32-pole terminal rail [ASK]
● Compact connector 10-pole silver/24-pole silver [KS1, KS3]
Cable entry 3 blanking plugs M20 x 1.5
Hood Standard: Polycarbonate (flammability class V0)
Options: Aluminium with indicator glass
Local controls [VSE] (option), IP65 ● MANUAL/AUTO change-over
● Rotary switch (non latching) for OPEN and CLOSE [VSE]

With base and lever (option)

Lever size ● With lever size 100 mm (distance from axis to bore) [LAG-HEB]
● Lever lengths 150/200 mm on request

Features and functions of actuator controls

Limit switching and digital outputs Standard: 2 switches for limit seating in the end positions. Used to set the limit positions for the end
positions.
Options: ● Additional limit switches for signalling the end positions or intermediate positions, freely
adjustable max. 250 V AC, max. 10 A (resistive load), max. 5 A (inductive load), max. 2
switches [2WE]
● Additional limit switches for signalling the end positions or intermediate positions, freely
adjustable with gold-plated contacts for low voltage, max. 30 V AC, max. 0.1 A (resistive
load), max. 2 switches [2WE-G]
Torque switching and digital outputs Standard: 2 switches used to switch off the actuator when reaching the maximum torque. Not adjustable
Option: 2 additional potential-free torque switches [2DE] signalling once the maximum torque is
reached, not adjustable. Max. 250 V AC, max. 10 A (resistive load), max. 5 A (inductive load)
Digital inputs Standard: None
Options: With 2 inputs (reversing contactors) for OPEN and CLOSE, option for:
● 24 V DC; 1,7 W appropriate for PLC [WSE]
● 24 V AC/DC
● 110 V AC
● 230 V AC
Positioner (option) Positioning electronics for actuator control [PEL100, PEL-GL]
Input 0 – 10 V, 0/4 – 20 mA, output 0 – 10 V, 0/4 – 20 mA
Position feedback signal, analogue ● Potentiometer 100/130/200/500/1 000/5 000 Ωor 10 kΩ [POT]
(options) Linearity fault ≦0.5 %, max. 1.5 W, wiper current 30 mA, max. 2 units
● Electronic position feedback signal 2/3-wire technology [ESR100]
Output 0/4 – 20 mA, connecting voltage 24 V DC

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y006.637/003/en Issue 2.20 Page 2/3

EQ 40 – EQ 600

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Emergency operation module (option)

Emergency operation module ● 250 Nm with 24 V DC or 90 – 264 V AC [FSC20]
● 450 Nm with 24 V DC or 90 – 264 V AC [FSC20]

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position, but not suspended downward
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2,000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature Standard: 0 °C to +60 °C with options (a.o. electronic sub-assembly)
0 °C to +50 °C with positioner option (PEL)
Option: –20 °C to +60 °C (heater required)
Enclosure protection according to EN Standard: IP67
60529 IP65 for versions with local controls, FSC module or transformer
Option: IP68 (version with larger output drive unit and valve attachment F05/F07/F10)
According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
Explosion-protection (option) Ex II 3D IP65 T 150°C Dc [A-Ex]
Corrosion protection C2 according to EN ISO 12944-2
Coating Powder coating
Colour AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Lifetime AUMA part-turn actuators meet or exceed the lifetime requirements of EN 15714-2. Detailed information
can be provided on request.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y006.637/003/en Issue 2.20 Page 3/3

PF-M25 – PF-M100

Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

General information
AUMA multi-turn actuators PF-M25 – PF-M100 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Output speed in Torque Modulat- Valve attach- Valve shaft Stem Stem Handwheel5) Weight6)
rpm1) range3) ing ment stroke Ø
(selection of 9 torque4)
levels)2)
Cylindric- For rising For rising
al Square Two-flat stem7) stem7) Reduc-
Max. Max. Standard Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Ø tion ra- approx.
PF-M V2 V3 [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] tio [kg]
25 1–6 2 – 14 10 – 25 12.5 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 40 23 100 80 : 1 8
50 0.5 – 3 1–6 20 – 50 25 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 40 23 100 80 : 1 8
100 0.5 – 1.5 0.5 – 3 40 – 100 50 F07/F10 38 30 27 50 26 160 70 : 1 11

1) The values for output speed refers to an operation at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque.
2) Operating times can be selected in 9 levels when placing the order. Settable via Bluetooth in steps of 1 % within the range.
3) The tripping torque is adjustable for directions OPEN and CLOSE within the indicated torque range. The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows
increasing the pre-set tripping torque to 127 % (unseating torque). This increase only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period. This allows
unseating blocked valves.
4) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty. The values from the column “Torque range” still apply as tripping torques.
5) Handwheels and reduction ratio of part-turn version. Smaller reduction ratios are planned and consequently fewer handwheel revolutions.
6) Specified weight includes Multi-turn actuator-turn actuator, unbored coupling and handwheel.
7) For output drive type A.

Features and functions

Type of duty Open-close Classes A and B according to EN 15714-2, short-time duty S2 - 15 min
duty:
Modulating Class C according to EN 15714-2, intermittent duty S4 - 50 % with maximum number of
duty: starts:
● PF-M25: 1,200 starts/h
● PF-M50: 1,200 starts/h
● PF-M100: 1,200 starts/h
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at load with 35 % of the maximum torque. The
type of duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection Via calculated temperature value
Self-locking Yes, at standstill with spring-applied brake
Turns / stroke Standard: 1 – 27 turns/stroke
Option: 27 – 400 turns/stroke
Solutions for a mechanical position indication are available up to maximum 54 turns/stroke.
Limit switching Via hall sensors
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement. Tripping torques adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication.
Versions:
1 – 9 turns/stroke
9 – 14 turns/stroke
14 – 27 turns/stroke
Option: Without mechanical position indicator
Manual operation Standard: Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during elec-
trical operation.
Option: Without manual operation, this means handwheel and handwheel shaft are obsolete.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.914/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100

Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: ● Coupling unbored extended
● Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Standard: Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211
Options: ● With output drive type A
● With LE linear thrust unit
● With GS worm gearbox

Features and functions

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current:
100 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz
Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %
Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
Option:
DC current: 24 V DC ±10 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data for PROFOX Part-turn actuators
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics With integral motor controller (current consumption in standby mode < 3 W)
Control (input signals) 3 digital in- 3 digital inputs (via opto-isolator, with one common)
puts ● Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
● Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
● All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential
● All inputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
CLOSE, OPEN, STOP
● Assignment for option with positioner:
MODE, CLOSE, OPEN
Analogue in- ● 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
put ● No galvanic isolation
(option) ● Used as input signal for position setpoint (in combination with positioner) or as input signal
for motor speed
Status signals 3 digital out- ● Freely configurable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 100 mA
(output signals) puts (resistive load)
● Outputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
End position CLOSED (high active), end position OPEN (high active), collective fault
signal (low active)
Analogue ● Position feedback signal 0/4 – 20 mA (load maximum 500 Ω) or 0 – 10 V
output ● No galvanic isolation
Voltage output (option) Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 40 mA for supply of control inputs, without galvanic isolation.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.914/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 2/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100

Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Functions Standard: ● Switch-off mode adjustable:
Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Torque monitoring across the whole travel
● Torque by-pass
● Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour:
- Digital input low active,
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position
OPEN
● Speed control
- Ramps
- Program operation profiles
- Programming specific speed for OPEN and CLOSE operations or one digital input
● Positioner
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
Option: ● Positioner
- Position setpoint via analogue input E1 = 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via digital MODE input
Bluetooth Bluetooth class II chip, with a range of min. 3 m in industrial environments.
Communication interface Required accessories:
● AUMA CDT (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Windows-based PC)
● AUMA Assistant App (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Android and iOS devices)
Electrical connection Cable entry: 3 x M20x1.5 threads for cable glands.
Inside rail with spring clamp terminals for wire connection.
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPC P00A1A1A100000, standard
TPC P00A1B1A100000, version with positioner

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.914/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 3/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100

Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Operation and Display

Basic Status indica- FOX-EYE (indication LED)
at the actuator tion Status indications: OK, end positions, faults and “Bluetooth connection active”.
Set end posi- 4 buttons and 1 LED are located below the hood.
tions Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve
Smart Set end posi- Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
Via Bluetooth using AUMA Assistant tions
App or AUMA CDT software in the Configuration Basic settings for opera- ● Rotation speed
latest version tion: ● Type of seating for end positions,
Torque switching
● Assignment of signal inputs and outputs
● Fieldbus parameter (if fieldbus option has been selected).
Additional functions: For applications, safety and service, including:
● Positioner
● EMERGENCY behaviour
● Torque by-pass
● Failure behaviour
● Signal configuration
Diagnostics Monitoring key figures and measured values for preventive maintenance and consequently
increasing process safety. Limit values can be set. Deviations generate warning signals which
can be transmitted to the DCS via binary outputs or fieldbus.
Actuator: Temperature value within actuator
Key figures regarding lifetime of mechanics, grease, electronics,
and motor.
Actuator and valve: Method for identifying changes in torque requirement: Perform
reference operation and save torque as reference profile. Define
tolerance range. Perform comparative operation if required. Values
outside tolerance initiate a signal which is communicated as de-
scribed above.
Further key figures: In basic version, the actuator monitors and records further figures
and conditions. The generated fault and warning signals are saved
within the event log.These signals can be configured as requested.
An overview in the AUMA Assistant App or the CDT software
shows all available fault/warning signals with option to enter the
details.

With output drive type A for valve shafts with threads (option)

Stem stroke Trapezoidal thread Valve attachment

Max. Ø
[mm] Max.
M25 with A07.2-F07 55 TR22 F07 (option F10)
M50 with A07.2-F07 55 TR22 F07 (option F10)
M100 with A07.2-F07 65 TR26 F07 (option F10)
M100 with A07.2-F10 55 TR26 F10

The stem stroke can be increased by using spacer elements as special solution; available on request.

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2 000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –30 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.914/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 4/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100

Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Service conditions
Enclosure protection in accordance Standard: IP67
with IEC 60529
Option: According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Continuous immersion in water: maximal 96 hours
● Up to 10 operations during immersion
● Modulating duty is not possible during immersion
Pollution degree according to Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
IEC 60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
Seismic resistance according to Test proof for application class 3
IEC 60068-3-3
Corrosion protection Standard: KS
Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high pollution.
Option: KX
Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 10,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: One operation cycle consists of 25 turns in both directions (OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN)
Modulating 1.8 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number
of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
Reference documents Dimensions PF-M25 – PF-M100
Electrical data PF-M25 – PF-M100

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.914/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 5/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Profibus DP
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

General information
AUMA multi-turn actuators PF-M25 – PF-M100 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Output speed in Torque Modulat- Valve attach- Valve shaft Stem Stem Handwheel5) Weight6)
rpm1) range3) ing ment stroke Ø
(selection of 9 torque4)
levels)2)
Cylindric- For rising For rising
al Square Two-flat stem7) stem7) Reduc-
Max. Max. Standard Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Ø tion ra- approx.
PF-M V2 V3 [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] tio [kg]
25 1–6 2 – 14 10 – 25 12.5 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 40 23 100 80 : 1 8
50 0.5 – 3 1–6 20 – 50 25 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 40 23 100 80 : 1 8
100 0.5 – 1.5 0.5 – 3 40 – 100 50 F07/F10 38 30 27 50 26 160 70 : 1 11

1) The values for output speed refers to an operation at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque.
2) Operating times can be selected in 9 levels when placing the order. Settable via Bluetooth in steps of 1 % within the range.
3) The tripping torque is adjustable for directions OPEN and CLOSE within the indicated torque range. The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows
increasing the pre-set tripping torque to 127 % (unseating torque). This increase only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period. This allows
unseating blocked valves.
4) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty. The values from the column “Torque range” still apply as tripping torques.
5) Handwheels and reduction ratio of part-turn version. Smaller reduction ratios are planned and consequently fewer handwheel revolutions.
6) Specified weight includes Multi-turn actuator-turn actuator, unbored coupling and handwheel.
7) For output drive type A.

Features and functions

Type of duty Open-close Classes A and B according to EN 15714-2, short-time duty S2 - 15 min
duty:
Modulating Class C according to EN 15714-2, intermittent duty S4 - 50 % with maximum number of
duty: starts:
● PF-M25: 1,200 starts/h
● PF-M50: 1,200 starts/h
● PF-M100: 1,200 starts/h
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at load with 35 % of the maximum torque. The
type of duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection Via calculated temperature value
Self-locking Yes, at standstill with spring-applied brake
Turns / stroke Standard: 1 – 27 turns/stroke
Option: 27 – 400 turns/stroke
Solutions for a mechanical position indication are available up to maximum 54 turns/stroke.
Limit switching Via hall sensors
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement. Tripping torques adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication.
Versions:
1 – 9 turns/stroke
9 – 14 turns/stroke
14 – 27 turns/stroke
Option: Without mechanical position indicator
Manual operation Standard: Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during elec-
trical operation.
Option: Without manual operation, this means handwheel and handwheel shaft are obsolete.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.174/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Profibus DP
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: ● Coupling unbored extended
● Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Standard: Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211
Options: ● With output drive type A
● With LE linear thrust unit
● With GS worm gearbox

Features and functions

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current:
100 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz
Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %
Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
Option:
DC current: 24 V DC ±10 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data for PROFOX Part-turn actuators
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics With integral motor controller (current consumption in standby mode < 3 W)
Profibus DP-V1 (option) Access to parameters, the electronic name plate and the operating and diagnostic services with acyclic
write/read services
Galvanically isolated towards I/O interfaces.
Control fieldbus Operation commands and setpoint via Profibus DP interface interface
(input signals)
Status signals fieldbus Via Profibus DP interface
(output signals)
I/O control 3 digital ● Via opto-isolator, with one common
(input signals) Inputs: ● Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
● Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
● All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential
● All inputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
OPEN, CLOSE, I/O interface
I/O interface: Selection of control source (fieldbus interface or I/O input signals).
Factory setting of “I/O Interface” signal: Input signal 0 V = fieldbus interface is active
Analogue in- ● 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
put ● No galvanic isolation
(option) ● Used as input for the position setpoint (then, definition is made via 2 binary inputs which
command source is active for the positioning: fieldbus or analogue input) or for a sensor
signal which can be further transmitted via fieldbus.
Status signals via I/O 3 digital ● Freely configurable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 100 mA
(Input signals) Outputs: (resistive load)
● Outputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
End position CLOSED (high active), end position OPEN (high active), collective fault
signal (low active)
Analogue ● Position feedback signal 0/4 – 20 mA (load maximum 500 Ω) or 0 – 10 V
output: ● No galvanic isolation
Voltage output (option) Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 40 mA for supply of control inputs, without galvanic isolation.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.174/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 2/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Profibus DP
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Functions Standard: ● Switch-off mode adjustable:
Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Torque monitoring across the whole travel
● Torque by-pass
● Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour:
- Digital input low active,
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position
OPEN
● Speed control
- Ramps
- Program operation profiles
- Programming specific speed for OPEN and CLOSE operations or one digital input
● Positioner
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
Bluetooth Bluetooth class II chip, with a range of min. 3 m in industrial environments.
Communication interface Required accessories:
● AUMA CDT (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Windows-based PC)
● AUMA Assistant App (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Android and iOS devices)
Electrical connection Cable entry: 3 x M20x1.5 threads for cable glands.
Inside rail with spring clamp terminals for wire connection.
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPC PA0B1A1A100000, standard

Setting/programming the Profibus DP interface

Baud rate setting Automatic baud rate recognition
Setting the Profibus DP interface The setting of the Profibus DP address is made via parameters using the AUMA Software CDT or AUMA
Assistant App.

General Profibus DP interface data

Communication protocol Profibus DP according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784-1
Network topology ● Line (fieldbus) structure.
● When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented
● Coupling and uncoupling of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible
Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158
Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)
Transmission rate/cable length ● Baud rate and maximum cable length (segment length) without repeater:
- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: 1,200 m
- for 187.5 kbit/s: 1,000 m
- for 500 kbit/s: 400 m
- for 1,500 kbit/s: 200 m
● Baud rate and possible cable length with repeater (total network cable length):
- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
- for 187.5 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
- for 500 kbit/s: approx. 4 km
- for 1,500 kbit/s: approx. 2 km
Device type ● DP master class 1, e.g. central controllers such as PLC, PC,.
● DP master class 2, e.g. parts programming/configuration tools
● DP slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 126
Bus access ● Token-passing between masters and polling for slaves
● Mono-master or multi-master systems are possible.
Supported fieldbus functions Cyclic data exchange, sync mode, freeze mode, fail safe mode
Profibus DP ident no. 0x1146. Standard applications with Profibus DP-V0 and DP-V1

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.174/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 3/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Profibus DP
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Commands and signals of the Profibus DP interface

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command
(command signals)
Process representation input ● End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) ● Actual position value
● Selector in position LOCAL/REMOTE/OFF
● Torque switches OPEN, CLOSED
● Limit switches OPEN, CLOSE
Process representation input ● Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
(fault signal)
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
● Stop at current position
● Execute operation to end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Travel to any intermediate position
● Execute last received operation command

Operation and Display

Basic Status indica- FOX-EYE (indication LED)
at the actuator tion Status indications: OK, end positions, faults and “Bluetooth connection active”.
Set end posi- 4 buttons and 1 LED are located below the hood.
tions Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve
Smart Set end posi- Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
Via Bluetooth using AUMA Assistant tions
App or AUMA CDT software in the Configuration Basic settings for opera- ● Rotation speed
latest version tion: ● Type of seating for end positions,
Torque switching
● Assignment of signal inputs and outputs
● Fieldbus parameter (if fieldbus option has been selected).
Additional functions: For applications, safety and service, including:
● Positioner
● EMERGENCY behaviour
● Torque by-pass
● Failure behaviour
● Signal configuration
Diagnostics Monitoring key figures and measured values for preventive maintenance and consequently
increasing process safety. Limit values can be set. Deviations generate warning signals which
can be transmitted to the DCS via binary outputs or fieldbus.
Actuator: Temperature value within actuator
Key figures regarding lifetime of mechanics, grease, electronics,
and motor.
Actuator and valve: Method for identifying changes in torque requirement: Perform
reference operation and save torque as reference profile. Define
tolerance range. Perform comparative operation if required. Values
outside tolerance initiate a signal which is communicated as de-
scribed above.
Further key figures: In basic version, the actuator monitors and records further figures
and conditions. The generated fault and warning signals are saved
within the event log.These signals can be configured as requested.
An overview in the AUMA Assistant App or the CDT software
shows all available fault/warning signals with option to enter the
details.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.174/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 4/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Profibus DP
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

With output drive type A for valve shafts with threads (option)

Stem stroke Trapezoidal thread Valve attachment

Max. Ø
[mm] Max.
M25 with A07.2-F07 55 TR22 F07 (option F10)
M50 with A07.2-F07 55 TR22 F07 (option F10)
M100 with A07.2-F07 65 TR26 F07 (option F10)
M100 with A07.2-F10 55 TR26 F10

The stem stroke can be increased by using spacer elements as special solution; available on request.

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2 000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –30 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection in accordance Standard: IP67
with IEC 60529
Option: According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Continuous immersion in water: maximal 96 hours
● Up to 10 operations during immersion
● Modulating duty is not possible during immersion
Pollution degree according to Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
IEC 60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
Seismic resistance according to Test proof for application class 3
IEC 60068-3-3
Corrosion protection Standard: KS
Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high pollution.
Option: KX
Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 10,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: One operation cycle consists of 25 turns in both directions (OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN)
Modulating 1.8 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number
of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
Reference documents Dimensions PF-M25 – PF-M100
Electrical data PF-M25 – PF-M100

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.174/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 5/5

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Modbus RTU
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

General information
AUMA multi-turn actuators PF-M25 – PF-M100 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Output speed in Torque Modulat- Valve attach- Valve shaft Stem Stem Handwheel5) Weight6)
rpm1) range3) ing ment stroke Ø
(selection of 9 torque4)
levels)2)
Cylindric- For rising For rising
al Square Two-flat stem7) stem7) Reduc-
Max. Max. Standard Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Ø tion ra- approx.
PF-M V2 V3 [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] tio [kg]
25 1–6 2 – 14 10 – 25 12.5 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 40 23 100 80 : 1 8
50 0.5 – 3 1–6 20 – 50 25 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 40 23 100 80 : 1 8
100 0.5 – 1.5 0.5 – 3 40 – 100 50 F07/F10 38 30 27 50 26 160 70 : 1 11

1) The values for output speed refers to an operation at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque.
2) Operating times can be selected in 9 levels when placing the order. Settable via Bluetooth in steps of 1 % within the range.
3) The tripping torque is adjustable for directions OPEN and CLOSE within the indicated torque range. The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows
increasing the pre-set tripping torque to 127 % (unseating torque). This increase only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period. This allows
unseating blocked valves.
4) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty. The values from the column “Torque range” still apply as tripping torques.
5) Handwheels and reduction ratio of part-turn version. Smaller reduction ratios are planned and consequently fewer handwheel revolutions.
6) Specified weight includes Multi-turn actuator-turn actuator, unbored coupling and handwheel.
7) For output drive type A.

Features and functions

Type of duty Open-close Classes A and B according to EN 15714-2, short-time duty S2 - 15 min
duty:
Modulating Class C according to EN 15714-2, intermittent duty S4 - 50 % with maximum number of
duty: starts:
● PF-M25: 1,200 starts/h
● PF-M50: 1,200 starts/h
● PF-M100: 1,200 starts/h
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at load with 35 % of the maximum torque. The
type of duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection Via calculated temperature value
Self-locking Yes, at standstill with spring-applied brake
Turns / stroke Standard: 1 – 27 turns/stroke
Option: 27 – 400 turns/stroke
Solutions for a mechanical position indication are available up to maximum 54 turns/stroke.
Limit switching Via hall sensors
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement. Tripping torques adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication.
Versions:
1 – 9 turns/stroke
9 – 14 turns/stroke
14 – 27 turns/stroke
Option: Without mechanical position indicator
Manual operation Standard: Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during elec-
trical operation.
Option: Without manual operation, this means handwheel and handwheel shaft are obsolete.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.404/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/6

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Modbus RTU
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: ● Coupling unbored extended
● Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Standard: Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211
Options: ● With output drive type A
● With LE linear thrust unit
● With GS worm gearbox

Features and functions

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current:
100 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz
Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %
Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
Option:
DC current: 24 V DC ±10 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data for PROFOX Part-turn actuators
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics With integral motor controller (current consumption in standby mode < 3 W)
Modbus RTU interface Access to parameters, the electronic name plate and the operating and diagnostic services with acyclic
write/read services
Galvanically isolated towards I/O interfaces.
Control fieldbus Operation commands and setpoint via Modbus RTU interface
(input signals)
Status signals fieldbus Via Modbus RTU interface
(output signals)
I/O control 3 digital ● Via opto-isolator, with one common
(input signals) Inputs: ● Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
● Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
● All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential
● All inputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
OPEN, CLOSE, I/O interface
I/O interface: Selection of control source (fieldbus interface or I/O input signals).
Factory setting of “I/O Interface” signal: Input signal 0 V = fieldbus interface is active
Analogue in- ● 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
put ● No galvanic isolation
(option) ● Used as input for the position setpoint (then, definition is made via 2 binary inputs which
command source is active for the positioning: fieldbus or analogue input) or for a sensor
signal which can be further transmitted via fieldbus.
Status signals via I/O 3 digital ● Freely configurable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 100 mA
(Input signals) Outputs: (resistive load)
● Outputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
End position CLOSED (high active), end position OPEN (high active), collective fault
signal (low active)
Analogue ● Position feedback signal 0/4 – 20 mA (load maximum 500 Ω) or 0 – 10 V
output: ● No galvanic isolation
Voltage output (option) Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 40 mA for supply of control inputs, without galvanic isolation.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.404/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 2/6

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Modbus RTU
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Functions Standard: ● Switch-off mode adjustable:
Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Torque monitoring across the whole travel
● Torque by-pass
● Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour:
- Digital input low active,
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position
OPEN
● Speed control
- Ramps
- Program operation profiles
- Programming specific speed for OPEN and CLOSE operations or one digital input
● Positioner
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
Bluetooth Bluetooth class II chip, with a range of min. 3 m in industrial environments.
Communication interface Required accessories:
● AUMA CDT (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Windows-based PC)
● AUMA Assistant App (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Android and iOS devices)
Electrical connection Cable entry: 3 x M20x1.5 threads for cable glands.
Inside rail with spring clamp terminals for wire connection.
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPC PC0B1A1A100000, standard

Setting/programming the Modbus RTU interface

Setting the Modbus RTU interface The settings of the Modbus address as well as parity and baud rate are made via parameters using the
AUMA CDT software or the AUMA Assistant App.

General data of the Modbus RTU interface

Communication protocol Modbus RTU according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784
Network topology Line (fieldbus) structure. When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented. Coupling and
uncoupling of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible.
Redundancy (option)
2
Redundant loop topology in combination with SIMA Master Station:
● Max. number of actuators with controls per redundant loop: 247 units
● Max. possible cable length between the actuators equipped with controls without external repeater:
1,200 m
● Max. possible total length per redundant loop: approx. 290 km
2
● Automatic commissioning of the redundant loop by means of the SIMA Master Station

Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158

Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)
Transmission rate/cable length Line topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Possible cable length with repeater
(segment length) without repeater (total network cable length)
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 10 km

Redundant loop topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Max. possible cable length of redund-
between actuators ant loop
(without repeater)
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 290 km

Device types Modbus slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 247
Fieldbus access Polling between master and slaves (query response).

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.404/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 3/6

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Modbus RTU
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Supported fieldbus functions (ser- 01 Read Coil Status

vices)
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
15 (0FHex) Force Multiple Coils
06 Preset Single Register
16 (10Hex) Preset Multiple Registers
17 (11Hex) Report Slave ID
08 Diagnostics:
● 00 00 Loopback
● 00 10 (0AHex) Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register
● 00 11 (0BHex) Return Bus Message Count
● 00 12 (0CHex) Return Bus Communication Error Count
● 00 13 (0DHex) Return Bus Exception Error Count
● 00 14 (0EHex) Return Slave Message Count
● 00 15 (0FHex) Return Slave No Response Count
● 00 16 (10Hex) Return Slave NAK Count
● 00 17 (11Hex) Return Slave Busy Count
● 00 18 (12Hex) Return Character Overrun Count

Commands and signals of the Modbus RTU interface

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command
(command signals)
Process representation input ● End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) ● Actual position value
● Selector in position LOCAL/REMOTE/OFF
● Torque switches OPEN, CLOSE
● Limit switches OPEN, CLOSE
Process representation input ● Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
(fault signal)
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
● Stop at current position
● Execute operation to end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Travel to any intermediate position
● Execute last received operation command

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.404/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 4/6

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Modbus RTU
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Operation and Display

Basic Status indica- FOX-EYE (indication LED)
at the actuator tion Status indications: OK, end positions, faults and “Bluetooth connection active”.
Set end posi- 4 buttons and 1 LED are located below the hood.
tions Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve
Smart Set end posi- Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
Via Bluetooth using AUMA Assistant tions
App or AUMA CDT software in the Configuration Basic settings for opera- ● Rotation speed
latest version tion: ● Type of seating for end positions,
Torque switching
● Assignment of signal inputs and outputs
● Fieldbus parameter (if fieldbus option has been selected).
Additional functions: For applications, safety and service, including:
● Positioner
● EMERGENCY behaviour
● Torque by-pass
● Failure behaviour
● Signal configuration
Diagnostics Monitoring key figures and measured values for preventive maintenance and consequently
increasing process safety. Limit values can be set. Deviations generate warning signals which
can be transmitted to the DCS via binary outputs or fieldbus.
Actuator: Temperature value within actuator
Key figures regarding lifetime of mechanics, grease, electronics,
and motor.
Actuator and valve: Method for identifying changes in torque requirement: Perform
reference operation and save torque as reference profile. Define
tolerance range. Perform comparative operation if required. Values
outside tolerance initiate a signal which is communicated as de-
scribed above.
Further key figures: In basic version, the actuator monitors and records further figures
and conditions. The generated fault and warning signals are saved
within the event log.These signals can be configured as requested.
An overview in the AUMA Assistant App or the CDT software
shows all available fault/warning signals with option to enter the
details.

With output drive type A for valve shafts with threads (option)

Stem stroke Trapezoidal thread Valve attachment

Max. Ø
[mm] Max.
M25 with A07.2-F07 55 TR22 F07 (option F10)
M50 with A07.2-F07 55 TR22 F07 (option F10)
M100 with A07.2-F07 65 TR26 F07 (option F10)
M100 with A07.2-F10 55 TR26 F10

The stem stroke can be increased by using spacer elements as special solution; available on request.

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2 000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –30 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.404/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 5/6

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Modbus RTU
Technical data Multi-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Service conditions
Enclosure protection in accordance Standard: IP67
with IEC 60529
Option: According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Continuous immersion in water: maximal 96 hours
● Up to 10 operations during immersion
● Modulating duty is not possible during immersion
Pollution degree according to Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
IEC 60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
Seismic resistance according to Test proof for application class 3
IEC 60068-3-3
Corrosion protection Standard: KS
Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high pollution.
Option: KX
Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 10,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: One operation cycle consists of 25 turns in both directions (OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN)
Modulating 1.8 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number
of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
Reference documents Dimensions PF-M25 – PF-M100
Electrical data PF-M25 – PF-M100

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.404/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 6/6

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

General information
AUMA part-turn actuators PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Operating time for 90° in seconds1) Torque Modulat- Valve attachment Valve shaft Handwheel Weight5)
(selection of 9 levels)2) range3) ing
torque4)
Cylindrical Square Two-flat
Max. Max. Standard Max. Max. Max. Ø Turns approx.
PF-Q V1 V2 V3 [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] for 90° [kg]
80 16 – 160 8 – 80 4 – 40 32 – 80 40 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 100 20.2 8
150 32 – 320 16 – 160 8 – 80 60 – 150 75 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 100 20.2 8
300 63 – 320 45 – 320 22 – 160 120 – 300 150 F07/F10 38 30 27 160 16.3 11
600 – 75 – 320 45 – 320 240 – 600 300 F07/F10 38 30 27 160 16.3 11

1) The values for operating times refer to an operation across 90° of travel at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque. Operating times without considering soft
start/soft stop. Soft start/soft stop is preselected for the factory settings.
2) Operating time can be selected in 9 levels when placing the order. Settable via Bluetooth in steps of 1 % within the range.
3) The tripping torque is adjustable for directions OPEN and CLOSE within the indicated torque range. The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows
increasing the pre-set tripping torque to 127 % (unseating torque). This increase only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period. This allows
unseating blocked valves.
4) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty. The values from the column “Torque range” still apply as tripping torques.
5) Specified weight includes part-turn actuator, unbored coupling and handwheel.

Features and functions

Type of duty Open-close Classes A and B according to EN 15714-2, short-time duty S2 - 15 min
duty:
Modulating Class C according to EN 15714-2, intermittent duty S4 - 50 %, with maximum number of
duty: 1,200 starts/h
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at load with 35 % of the maximum torque. The
type of duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection Via calculated temperature value
Self-locking Yes, at standstill with spring-applied brake
Swing angle Standard: 90° ±15° adjustable between min. and max. values (with mechanical end stops)
Option: 120° ±15° adjustable between min. and max. values (with mechanical end stops)
45° – 360° adjustable between min. and max. values (without mechanical end stops)
Limit switching Via hall sensors
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement. Tripping torques adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication, for 90° or 120°
Via own markings at indication 45° – 360°
Option: Without mechanical position indicator
Manual operation Standard: Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during elec-
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 trical operation
Option: Without manual operation, this means handwheel and handwheel shaft are obsolete. The
end stops are included except version with swing angle 45° – 360°.
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: ● Coupling unbored extended
● Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.894/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/4

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current:
100 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz
The voltage range may be exceeded or undercut by max. 10 %
The frequency range may be exceeded or undercut by max. 5 %
Option:
DC current: 24 V DC ±10 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data PROFOX Part-turn actuators
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics With integral motor controller (current consumption in standby mode < 3 W)
Control 3 digital in- ● Via opto-isolator, with one common
(input signals) puts: ● Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
● Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
● All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential.
● All inputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
CLOSE, OPEN, STOP
● Assignment for option with positioner:
MODE, CLOSE, OPEN
Analogue in- ● 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
put ● No galvanic isolation
(option) ● Used as input signal for position setpoint (in combination with positioner) or as input signal
for motor speed
Status signals 3 digital out- ● Freely configurable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 100 mA
(output signals) puts: (resistive load)
● Outputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
End position CLOSED (high active), end position OPEN (high active), collective fault
signal (low active)
Analogue ● Position feedback signal 0/4 – 20 mA (load maximum 500 Ω) or 0 – 10 V
output: ● No galvanic isolation
Voltage output (option) Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 80 mA for supply of control inputs, without galvanic isolation.
Functions Standard: ● Switch-off mode adjustable:
Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Torque monitoring across the whole travel
● Torque by-pass
● Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
- Digital input low active,
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position
OPEN
● Speed control
- Ramps
- Program operation profiles
- Program either specific speed for OPEN and CLOSE operations or one digital input
● Positioner
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
Option: ● Positioner
- Position setpoint via analogue input E1 = 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via digital MODE input

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.894/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 2/4

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Bluetooth Bluetooth class II chip, with a range of min. 3 m in industrial environments.
Communication interface Required accessories:
● AUMA CDT (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Windows-based PC)
● AUMA Assistant App (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Android and iOS devices)
Electrical connection Cable entry: 3 x M20x1.5 threads for cable glands.
Inside rail with spring clamp terminals for wire connection.
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPC P00A1A1A100000, standard
TPC P00A1B1A100000, version with positioner

Operation and Display

Basic Status indica- FOX-EYE (indication LED)
at the actuator tion Status indications: OK, end positions, faults and “Bluetooth connection active”
End position 4 buttons and 1 LED are located below the hood.
setting Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
Smart End position Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
via Bluetooth using AUMA Assistant setting
App or AUMA CDT software Configuration Basic settings for opera- ● Rotation speed
tion: ● Type of seating for end positions,
torque switching
● Assignment of signal inputs and outputs
● Fieldbus parameter (if fieldbus option has been selected)
Additional functions: For applications, safety and service, e.g.:
● Positioner
● EMERGENCY behaviour
● Torque by-pass
● Failure behaviour
● Signal configuration
Diagnostics Monitoring key figures and measured values for preventive maintenance and consequently
increasing process safety. Limit values can be set. Deviations generate warning signals which
can be transmitted to the DCS via binary outputs or fieldbus.
Actuator: Temperature value within actuator
Key figures regarding lifetime of electronics, brake, gearbox and
seals.
Actuator and valve: Method for identifying changes in torque requirement: Perform
reference operation and save torque as reference profile. Define
tolerance range. Perform comparison operation if required. Values
outside tolerance initiate a signal which is communicated as de-
scribed above.
Further key figures: Furthermore, the actuator monitors and records further figures
and conditions.The generated fault and warning signals are saved
within the event log. These signals can be configured as reques-
ted. An overview in the AUMA Assistant App or the CDT software
shows all available fault/warning signals with option to enter the
details.

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2 000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –30 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection in accordance Standard IP67
with IEC 60529
Option: According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Continuous immersion in water: maximal 96 hours
● Up to 10 operations during immersion
● Modulating duty is not possible during immersion

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.894/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 3/4

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Service conditions
Pollution degree according to Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
IEC 60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
Seismic resistance according to Test proof for application class 3
IEC 60068-3-3
Corrosion protection Standard: KS
Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high pollution.
Option: KX
Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 10,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED,
at a respective rotary movement of 90°.
Modulating 1.8 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number
of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
Reference documents Dimensions PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Electrical data PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.894/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 4/4

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Profibus DP
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Type Operating time for 90° in seconds1) Torque Modulat- Valve attachment Valve shaft Handwheel Weight5)
(selection of 9 levels)2) range3) ing
torque4)
Cylindrical Square Two-flat
Max. Max. Standard Max. Max. Max. Ø Turns approx.
PF-Q V1 V2 V3 [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] for 90° [kg]
80 16 – 160 8 – 80 4 – 40 32 – 80 40 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 100 20.2 8
150 32 – 320 16 – 160 8 – 80 60 – 150 75 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 100 20.2 8
300 63 – 320 45 – 320 22 – 160 120 – 300 150 F07/F10 38 30 27 160 16.3 11
600 – 75 – 320 45 – 320 240 – 600 300 F07/F10 38 30 27 160 16.3 11

1) The values for operating times refer to an operation across 90° of travel at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque. Operating times without considering soft
start/soft stop. Soft start/soft stop is preselected for the factory settings.
2) Operating time can be selected in 9 levels when placing the order. Settable via Bluetooth in steps of 1 % within the range.
3) The tripping torque is adjustable for directions OPEN and CLOSE within the indicated torque range. The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows
increasing the pre-set tripping torque to 127 % (unseating torque). This increase only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period. This allows
unseating blocked valves.
4) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty. The values from the column “Torque range” still apply as tripping torques.
5) Specified weight includes part-turn actuator, unbored coupling and handwheel.

Features and functions

Type of duty Open-close Classes A and B according to EN 15714-2, short-time duty S2 - 15 min
duty:
Modulating Class C according to EN 15714-2, intermittent duty S4 - 50 %, with maximum number of
duty: 1,200 starts/h
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at load with 35 % of the maximum torque. The
type of duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection Via calculated temperature value
Self-locking Yes, at standstill with spring-applied brake
Swing angle Standard: 90° ±15° adjustable between min. and max. values (with mechanical end stops)
Option: 120° ±15° adjustable between min. and max. values (with mechanical end stops)
45° – 360° adjustable between min. and max. values (without mechanical end stops)
Limit switching Via hall sensors
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement. Tripping torques adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication, for 90° or 120°
Via own markings at indication 45° – 360°
Option: Without mechanical position indicator
Manual operation Standard: Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during elec-
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 trical operation
Option: Without manual operation, this means handwheel and handwheel shaft are obsolete. The
end stops are included except version with swing angle 45° – 360°.
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: ● Coupling unbored extended
● Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.091/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Profibus DP
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current:
100 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz
The voltage range may be exceeded or undercut by max. 10 %
The frequency range may be exceeded or undercut by max. 5 %
Option:
DC current: 24 V DC ±10 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data PROFOX Part-turn actuators
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics With integral motor controller (current consumption in standby mode < 3 W)
Profibus DP-V1 (option) Access to parameters, the electronic name plate and the operating and diagnostic services with acyclic
write/read services
Galvanically isolated towards I/O interfaces.
Control fieldbus Operation commands and setpoint via fieldbus interface
(input signals)
Status signals fieldbus Via Profibus DP interface
(output signals)
I/O control 3 digital in- ● Via opto-isolator, with one common
(input signals) puts: ● Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
● Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
● All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential.
● All inputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
OPEN, CLOSE, I/O interface
I/O interface: Selection of control source (fieldbus interface or I/O input signals).
Factory setting of “I/O Interface” signal: Input signal 0 V = fieldbus interface is active
Analogue in- ● 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
put ● No galvanic isolation
(option) ● Used as input for the position setpoint (then, definition is made via 2 binary inputs which
command source is active for the positioning: fieldbus or analogue input) or for a sensor
signal which can be further transmitted via fieldbus.
Status signals via I/O 3 digital out- ● Freely configurable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 100 mA
(Input signals) puts: (resistive load)
● Outputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
End position CLOSED (high active), end position OPEN (high active), collective fault
signal (low active)
Analogue ● Position feedback signal 0/4 – 20 mA (load maximum 500 Ω) or 0 – 10 V
output: ● No galvanic isolation
Voltage output (option) Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 80 mA for supply of control inputs, without galvanic isolation.
Functions Standard: ● Switch-off mode adjustable:
Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Torque monitoring across the whole travel
● Torque by-pass
● Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
- Digital input low active,
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position
OPEN
● Speed control
- Ramps
- Program operation profiles
- Programming specific speed for OPEN and CLOSE operations or one digital input
● Positioner
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.091/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 2/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Profibus DP
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Bluetooth Bluetooth class II chip, with a range of min. 3 m in industrial environments.
Communication interface Required accessories:
● AUMA CDT (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Windows-based PC)
● AUMA Assistant App (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Android and iOS devices)
Electrical connection Cable entry: 3 x M20x1.5 threads for cable glands.
Inside rail with spring clamp terminals for wire connection.
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPC PA0B1A1A100000, standard

Setting/programming the Profibus DP interface

Baud rate setting Automatic baud rate recognition
Setting the Profibus DP interface The setting of the Profibus DP address is made via parameters using the AUMA Software CDT or AUMA
Assistant App.

General Profibus DP interface data

Communication protocol Profibus DP according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784-1
Network topology ● Line (fieldbus) structure.
● When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented
● Coupling and uncoupling of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible
Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158
Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)
Transmission rate/cable length ● Baud rate and maximum cable length (segment length) without repeater:
- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: 1,200 m
- for 187.5 kbit/s: 1,000 m
- for 500 kbit/s: 400 m
- for 1,500 kbit/s: 200 m
● Baud rate and possible cable length with repeater (total network cable length):
- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
- for 187.5 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
- for 500 kbit/s: approx. 4 km
- for 1,500 kbit/s: approx. 2 km
Device type ● DP master class 1, e.g. central controllers such as PLC, PC,.
● DP master class 2, e.g. parts programming/configuration tools
● DP slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 126
Bus access ● Token-passing between masters and polling for slaves
● Mono-master or multi-master systems are possible.
Supported fieldbus functions Cyclic data exchange, sync mode, freeze mode, fail safe mode
Profibus DP ident no. 0x1146. Standard applications with Profibus DP-V0 and DP-V1

Commands and signals of the Profibus DP interface

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command
(command signals)
Process representation input ● End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) ● Actual position value
● Selector in position LOCAL/REMOTE/OFF
● Torque switches OPEN, CLOSED
● Limit switches OPEN, CLOSE
Process representation input ● Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
(fault signal)
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
● Stop at current position
● Execute operation to end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Travel to any intermediate position
● Execute last received operation command

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.091/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 3/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Profibus DP
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Operation and Display

Basic Status indica- FOX-EYE (indication LED)
at the actuator tion Status indications: OK, end positions, faults and “Bluetooth connection active”
End position 4 buttons and 1 LED are located below the hood.
setting Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
Smart End position Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
via Bluetooth using AUMA Assistant setting
App or AUMA CDT software Configuration Basic settings for opera- ● Rotation speed
tion: ● Type of seating for end positions,
torque switching
● Assignment of signal inputs and outputs
● Fieldbus parameter (if fieldbus option has been selected)
Additional functions: For applications, safety and service, e.g.:
● Positioner
● EMERGENCY behaviour
● Torque by-pass
● Failure behaviour
● Signal configuration
Diagnostics Monitoring key figures and measured values for preventive maintenance and consequently
increasing process safety. Limit values can be set. Deviations generate warning signals which
can be transmitted to the DCS via binary outputs or fieldbus.
Actuator: Temperature value within actuator
Key figures regarding lifetime of electronics, brake, gearbox and
seals.
Actuator and valve: Method for identifying changes in torque requirement: Perform
reference operation and save torque as reference profile. Define
tolerance range. Perform comparison operation if required. Values
outside tolerance initiate a signal which is communicated as de-
scribed above.
Further key figures: Furthermore, the actuator monitors and records further figures
and conditions.The generated fault and warning signals are saved
within the event log. These signals can be configured as reques-
ted. An overview in the AUMA Assistant App or the CDT software
shows all available fault/warning signals with option to enter the
details.

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2 000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –30 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection in accordance Standard IP67
with IEC 60529
Option: According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Continuous immersion in water: maximal 96 hours
● Up to 10 operations during immersion
● Modulating duty is not possible during immersion
Pollution degree according to Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
IEC 60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
Seismic resistance according to Test proof for application class 3
IEC 60068-3-3

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.091/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 4/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Profibus DP
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Service conditions
Corrosion protection Standard: KS
Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high pollution.
Option: KX
Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 10,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED,
at a respective rotary movement of 90°.
Modulating 1.8 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number
of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
Reference documents Dimensions PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Electrical data PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.091/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 5/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Type Operating time for 90° in seconds1) Torque Modulat- Valve attachment Valve shaft Handwheel Weight5)
(selection of 9 levels)2) range3) ing
torque4)
Cylindrical Square Two-flat
Max. Max. Standard Max. Max. Max. Ø Turns approx.
PF-Q V1 V2 V3 [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] for 90° [kg]
80 16 – 160 8 – 80 4 – 40 32 – 80 40 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 100 20.2 8
150 32 – 320 16 – 160 8 – 80 60 – 150 75 F05/F07/F10 20 17 17 100 20.2 8
300 63 – 320 45 – 320 22 – 160 120 – 300 150 F07/F10 38 30 27 160 16.3 11
600 – 75 – 320 45 – 320 240 – 600 300 F07/F10 38 30 27 160 16.3 11

1) The values for operating times refer to an operation across 90° of travel at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque. Operating times without considering soft
start/soft stop. Soft start/soft stop is preselected for the factory settings.
2) Operating time can be selected in 9 levels when placing the order. Settable via Bluetooth in steps of 1 % within the range.
3) The tripping torque is adjustable for directions OPEN and CLOSE within the indicated torque range. The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows
increasing the pre-set tripping torque to 127 % (unseating torque). This increase only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period. This allows
unseating blocked valves.
4) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty. The values from the column “Torque range” still apply as tripping torques.
5) Specified weight includes part-turn actuator, unbored coupling and handwheel.

Features and functions

Type of duty Open-close Classes A and B according to EN 15714-2, short-time duty S2 - 15 min
duty:
Modulating Class C according to EN 15714-2, intermittent duty S4 - 50 %, with maximum number of
duty: 1,200 starts/h
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at load with 35 % of the maximum torque. The
type of duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection Via calculated temperature value
Self-locking Yes, at standstill with spring-applied brake
Swing angle Standard: 90° ±15° adjustable between min. and max. values (with mechanical end stops)
Option: 120° ±15° adjustable between min. and max. values (with mechanical end stops)
45° – 360° adjustable between min. and max. values (without mechanical end stops)
Limit switching Via hall sensors
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement. Tripping torques adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Standard: Continuous indication, for 90° or 120°
Via own markings at indication 45° – 360°
Option: Without mechanical position indicator
Manual operation Standard: Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during elec-
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 trical operation
Option: Without manual operation, this means handwheel and handwheel shaft are obsolete. The
end stops are included except version with swing angle 45° – 360°.
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: ● Coupling unbored extended
● Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.403/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current:
100 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz
The voltage range may be exceeded or undercut by max. 10 %
The frequency range may be exceeded or undercut by max. 5 %
Option:
DC current: 24 V DC ±10 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data PROFOX Part-turn actuators
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics With integral motor controller (current consumption in standby mode < 3 W)
Modbus RTU interface Access to parameters, the electronic name plate and the operating and diagnostic services with acyclic
write/read services
Galvanically isolated towards I/O interfaces.
Control fieldbus Operation commands and setpoint via Modbus RTU interface
(input signals)
Status signals fieldbus Via Modbus RTU interface
(output signals)
I/O control 3 digital in- ● Via opto-isolator, with one common
(input signals) puts: ● Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
● Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
● All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential.
● All inputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
OPEN, CLOSE, I/O interface
I/O interface: Selection of control source (fieldbus interface or I/O input signals).
Factory setting of “I/O Interface” signal: Input signal 0 V = fieldbus interface is active
Analogue in- ● 0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V
put ● No galvanic isolation
(option) ● Used as input for the position setpoint (then, definition is made via 2 binary inputs which
command source is active for the positioning: fieldbus or analogue input) or for a sensor
signal which can be further transmitted via fieldbus.
Status signals via I/O 3 digital out- ● Freely configurable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 100 mA
(Input signals) puts: (resistive load)
● Outputs can be configured as required
● Standard assignment:
End position CLOSED (high active), end position OPEN (high active), collective fault
signal (low active)
Analogue ● Position feedback signal 0/4 – 20 mA (load maximum 500 Ω) or 0 – 10 V
output: ● No galvanic isolation
Voltage output (option) Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 80 mA for supply of control inputs, without galvanic isolation.
Functions Standard: ● Switch-off mode adjustable:
Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Torque monitoring across the whole travel
● Torque by-pass
● Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
- Digital input low active,
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position
OPEN
● Speed control
- Ramps
- Program operation profiles
- Programming specific speed for OPEN and CLOSE operations or one digital input
● Positioner
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.403/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 2/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions

Bluetooth Bluetooth class II chip, with a range of min. 3 m in industrial environments.
Communication interface Required accessories:
● AUMA CDT (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Windows-based PC)
● AUMA Assistant App (Commissioning and Diagnostic Tool for Android and iOS devices)
Electrical connection Cable entry: 3 x M20x1.5 threads for cable glands.
Inside rail with spring clamp terminals for wire connection.
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPC PC0B1A1A100000, standard

Setting/programming the Modbus RTU interface

Setting the Modbus RTU interface The settings of the Modbus address as well as parity and baud rate are made via parameters using the
AUMA CDT software or the AUMA Assistant App.

Commands and signals of the Modbus RTU interface

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command
(command signals)
Process representation input ● End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) ● Actual position value
● Selector in position LOCAL/REMOTE/OFF
● Torque switches OPEN, CLOSE
● Limit switches OPEN, CLOSE
Process representation input ● Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
(fault signal)
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
● Stop at current position
● Execute operation to end positions OPEN and CLOSED
● Travel to any intermediate position
● Execute last received operation command

General data of the Modbus RTU interface

Communication protocol Modbus RTU according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784
Network topology Line (fieldbus) structure. When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented. Coupling and
uncoupling of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible.
Redundancy (option)
2
Redundant loop topology in combination with SIMA Master Station:
● Max. number of actuators with controls per redundant loop: 247 units
● Max. possible cable length between the actuators equipped with controls without external repeater:
1,200 m
● Max. possible total length per redundant loop: approx. 290 km
2
● Automatic commissioning of the redundant loop by means of the SIMA Master Station

Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158

Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)
Transmission rate/cable length Line topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Possible cable length with repeater
(segment length) without repeater (total network cable length)
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 10 km

Redundant loop topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Max. possible cable length of redund-
between actuators ant loop
(without repeater)
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 290 km

Device types Modbus slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 247
Fieldbus access Polling between master and slaves (query response).

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.403/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 3/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Supported fieldbus functions (ser- 01 Read Coil Status

vices)
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
15 (0FHex) Force Multiple Coils
06 Preset Single Register
16 (10Hex) Preset Multiple Registers
17 (11Hex) Report Slave ID
08 Diagnostics:
● 00 00 Loopback
● 00 10 (0AHex) Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register
● 00 11 (0BHex) Return Bus Message Count
● 00 12 (0CHex) Return Bus Communication Error Count
● 00 13 (0DHex) Return Bus Exception Error Count
● 00 14 (0EHex) Return Slave Message Count
● 00 15 (0FHex) Return Slave No Response Count
● 00 16 (10Hex) Return Slave NAK Count
● 00 17 (11Hex) Return Slave Busy Count
● 00 18 (12Hex) Return Character Overrun Count

Operation and Display

Basic Status indica- FOX-EYE (indication LED)
at the actuator tion Status indications: OK, end positions, faults and “Bluetooth connection active”
End position 4 buttons and 1 LED are located below the hood.
setting Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
Smart End position Run actuator in directions OPEN and CLOSE. Set end position once mounted to the valve.
via Bluetooth using AUMA Assistant setting
App or AUMA CDT software Configuration Basic settings for opera- ● Rotation speed
tion: ● Type of seating for end positions,
torque switching
● Assignment of signal inputs and outputs
● Fieldbus parameter (if fieldbus option has been selected)
Additional functions: For applications, safety and service, e.g.:
● Positioner
● EMERGENCY behaviour
● Torque by-pass
● Failure behaviour
● Signal configuration
Diagnostics Monitoring key figures and measured values for preventive maintenance and consequently
increasing process safety. Limit values can be set. Deviations generate warning signals which
can be transmitted to the DCS via binary outputs or fieldbus.
Actuator: Temperature value within actuator
Key figures regarding lifetime of electronics, brake, gearbox and
seals.
Actuator and valve: Method for identifying changes in torque requirement: Perform
reference operation and save torque as reference profile. Define
tolerance range. Perform comparison operation if required. Values
outside tolerance initiate a signal which is communicated as de-
scribed above.
Further key figures: Furthermore, the actuator monitors and records further figures
and conditions.The generated fault and warning signals are saved
within the event log. These signals can be configured as reques-
ted. An overview in the AUMA Assistant App or the CDT software
shows all available fault/warning signals with option to enter the
details.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.403/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 4/5

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators for open-close and modulating duty

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2,000 m above sea level
> 2 000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –30 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection in accordance Standard IP67
with IEC 60529
Option: According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
● Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
● Continuous immersion in water: maximal 96 hours
● Up to 10 operations during immersion
● Modulating duty is not possible during immersion
Pollution degree according to Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
IEC 60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
Seismic resistance according to Test proof for application class 3
IEC 60068-3-3
Corrosion protection Standard: KS
Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high pollution.
Option: KX
Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 10,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED,
at a respective rotary movement of 90°.
Modulating 1.8 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number
of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
Reference documents Dimensions PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Electrical data PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.403/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 5/5

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Type Operating time for 90° Torque range1) Running Valve attach- Valve shaft Handwheel Weight4)
in seconds torque2)/ ment
(adjustable in 9 steps) Modulating
torque3)
Max. Max. Standard Cylindrical Square Two-flat Ø Turns approx.
50 Hz/60 Hz [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 max. [mm] max. [mm] max. [mm] [mm] for 90° [kg]
SGC/SGCR 04.1 4 – 63 25 – 63 32 F05/F07 20 17 17 100 13.5 7.0
SGC/SGCR 05.1 4 – 63 50 – 125 63 F05/F07 20 17 17 100 13.5 7.0
SGC/SGCR 07.1 4 – 63 100 – 250 125 F07 25.4 22 22 125 13.5 10
SGC/SGCR 10.1 5.6 – 90 200 – 500 250 F10 38 30 27 160 13.5 15
SGC/SGCR 12.1 20 – 275 400 – 1,000 500 F12 50 36 41 125 35 25

Notes on table
1) Unseating torque The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows increasing the pre-set torque to 130 %. This increase
only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period, allowing safer unseating of blocked valves.
2) Running torque Maximum permissible torque for 15 min. running time.
3) Modulating torque Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty
4) Weight Indicated weight includes part-turn actuator with controls, electrical connection in standard version, unbored
coupling and handwheel

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, classes A and B according to EN 15714-2
duty
SGC:
Modulating Intermittent duty S4 - 40 % class C in compliance with EN 15714-2
duty with maximum number of 1,800 starts per hour (option)
SGCR:
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at running or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44081)
Self-locking Yes
Swing angle Standard: SGC/SGCR 04.1 – 10.1: 82° – 98° adjustable between min. and max. values
SGC/SGCR 12.1: 75 ° – 105 °
Options: Available swing angles on request
Limit switching Via position transmitter potentiometer, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE, adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during electrical operation
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: •• Coupling unbored extended
•• Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
-- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
-- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
-- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.986/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator controls

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 115 230
Hz 50/60 50/60

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data Part-turn actuators SGC/SGCR
External supply of the electronics 24 V DC +20 %/–15 %,
(option) Current consumption: With options up to 200 mA
The external power supply must have reinforced insulation against mains voltage in accordance with IEC
61800-5-1 and may only be supplied by a circuit limited to 150 VA in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics Power electronics with integral motor controller
Rated power Controls are designed for rated motor power, refer to Electrical Data Part-turn actuators SGC/SGCR
Control •• 4 digital inputs (via opto-isolator, with one common)
(input signals) -- Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
-- Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
-- All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential.
Assignment for open-close actuators:
-- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE (standard)
-- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, EMERGENCY (option)
-- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, MODE in combination with positioner (option)
-- OPEN, EMERGENCY, CLOSE, MODE in combination with positioner (option)
Assignment for modulating actuators:
-- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, MODE (standard)
-- OPEN, EMERGENCY, CLOSE, MODE (option)
•• Analogue input 0/4 – 20 mA (option)
Used as input signal for position setpoint E1 (in combination with positioner) or as input signal for motor
speed E3.
Status signals •• Output contacts:
(output signals) 4 programmable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 1 A (resistive load)
-- 2 NO contacts with one common
Default configuration: End position OPEN, end position CLOSED
-- 1 potential-free NO contact for collective fault signal
Default configuration: Torque fault, motor protection tripped
-- 1 potential-free change-over contact
Default configuration: Push button REMOTE
•• Analogue output:
Galvanically isolated position feedback 0/4 – 20 mA (load 500 Ω).
Voltage output Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 40 mA for supply of control inputs, galvanically isolated from internal voltage
supply.
Not available for option "external electronics supply".
Local controls Standard: •• Push buttons OPEN, STOP (LOCAL - REMOTE), CLOSE
•• 2 multi-colour indication lights:
-- End position CLOSED (yellow), fault/failure (red), end position OPEN (green),
operation mode LOCAL (blue)
Option: Local controls mounted separately on wall bracket

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.986/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Functions •• Switch-off mode adjustable:

-- Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
•• Torque monitoring across the whole travel
•• Torque by-pass
•• Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
-- Digital input low active,
-- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position OPEN
•• Positioner (for modulating actuators):
-- Position setpoint via analogue input E1 = 0/4 – 20 mA
-- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
-- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
-- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via digital MODE input
Electrical connection Standard: Plug/socket connector with crimp connection
Option: AUMA plug/socket connector with screw-type connection
Wiring diagram (basic version) Open-close TPC B-0E6-2C7-0530 TPA 50R200-0A0-000
duty:
Modulating TPC B-1H6-2C7-0530 TPA 50R200-0A0-000
duty:

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2 000 m above seal level
> 2,000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection according to IP68
EN 60529 According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
•• Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
•• Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
•• Up to 10 operations during continuous immersion
•• Modulating duty is not possible during continuous immersion
Pollution degree according to IEC Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
GL approval (option) Environmental categories D, G, EMC2
Corrosion protection Standard: KS Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Option: KX Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and
high pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 20,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED, at a
respective rotary movement of 90°.
Modulating 5 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number of
starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.986/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 3/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Further information
EU Directives Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (2014/30/EU)
Low Voltage Directive: (2014/35/EU)
Machinery Directive: (2006/42/EC)
Reference documents Dimensions SGC 04.1– SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Electrical data SGC 04.1– SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.986/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 4/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Profibus D
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Type Operating time for 90° Torque range1) Running Valve attach- Valve shaft Handwheel Weight4)
in seconds torque2)/ ment
(adjustable in 9 steps) Modulating
torque3)
Max. Max. Standard Cylindrical Square Two-flat Ø Turns approx.
50 Hz/60 Hz [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 max. [mm] max. [mm] max. [mm] [mm] for 90° [kg]
SGC/SGCR 04.1 4 – 63 25 – 63 32 F05/F07 20 17 17 100 13.5 7.0
SGC/SGCR 05.1 4 – 63 50 – 125 63 F05/F07 20 17 17 100 13.5 7.0
SGC/SGCR 07.1 4 – 63 100 – 250 125 F07 25.4 22 22 125 13.5 10
SGC/SGCR 10.1 5.6 – 90 200 – 500 250 F10 38 30 27 160 13.5 15
SGC/SGCR 12.1 20 – 275 400 – 1,000 500 F12 50 36 41 125 35 25

Notes on table
1) Unseating torque The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows increasing the pre-set torque to 130 %. This increase
only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period, allowing safer unseating of blocked valves.
2) Running torque Maximum permissible torque for 15 min. running time.
3) Modulating torque Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty
4) Weight Indicated weight includes part-turn actuator with controls, electrical connection in standard version, unbored
coupling and handwheel

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, classes A and B according to EN 15714-2
duty
SGC:
Modulating Intermittent duty S4 - 40 %, class C according to EN 15714-2
duty with maximum number of 1,800 starts per hour (option)
SGCR:
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at running or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44081)
Self-locking Yes
Swing angle Standard: SGC/SGCR 04.1 – 10.1: 82° – 98° adjustable between min. and max. values
SGC/SGCR 12.1: 75 ° – 105°
Options: Available swing angles on request
Limit switching Via position transmitter potentiometer, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE
Signalling via fieldbus interface
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE, adjustable in 8 steps
Signalling via fieldbus interface
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during electrical operation
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: •• Coupling unbored extended
•• Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
-- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
-- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
-- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.987/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Profibus D
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator controls

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 115 230
Hz 50/60 50/60

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data Part-turn actuators SGC/SGCR
External supply of the electronics 24 V DC +20 %/–15 %,
(option) Current consumption: With options up to 200 mA
The external power supply must have reinforced insulation against mains voltage in accordance with IEC
61800-5-1 and may only be supplied by a circuit limited to 150 VA in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics Power electronics with integral motor controller
Rated power Controls are designed for rated motor power, refer to Electrical Data Part-turn actuators SGC/SGCR
Control Operation commands and setpoint via fieldbus interface
(input signals)
Status signals Via fieldbus interface
(output signals)
Profibus DP-V1 (option) Access to parameters, the electronic name plate and the operating and diagnostic services with acyclic write/
read services
Local controls Standard: •• Push buttons OPEN, STOP (LOCAL - REMOTE), CLOSE
•• 2 multi-colour indication lights:
-- End position CLOSED (yellow), fault/failure (red), end position OPEN (green),
operation mode LOCAL (blue)
Option: Local controls mounted separately on wall bracket
Functions •• Switch-off mode adjustable:
-- Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
•• Torque monitoring across the whole travel
•• Torque by-pass
•• Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
-- via fieldbus interface
-- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position OPEN
•• Positioner:
-- Position setpoint via fieldbus interface
-- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
-- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
-- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via fieldbus interface
Electrical connection Standard: Plug/socket connector with crimp connection
Option: AUMA plug/socket connector with screw-type connection
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPCBA000-2A7-0540 TPA50R200-0A0-000

Settings/programming the Profibus DP interfac

Baud rate setting Automatic baud rate recognition
Setting the Profibus DP interface Setting of the Profibus DP address is performed via switches, alternatively also via parameters
Configurable process representation For an optimum adaptation to the process control system, the process representation can be configured as
via GSD file desired.

General Profibus DP interface dat

Communication protocol Profibus DP according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784-1
Network topology •• Line (fieldbus) structure.
•• When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented.
•• Coupling and uncoupling of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.987/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Profibus D
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158

Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)
Transmission rate/cable length •• Baud rate and maximum cable length (segment length) without repeater:
-- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: 1,200 m
-- for 187.5 kbit/s: 1,000 m
-- for 500 kbit/s: 400 m
-- for 1,500 kbit/s: 200 m
•• Baud rate and possible cable length with repeater (total network cable length):
-- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
-- for 187.5 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
-- for 500 kbit/s: approx. 4 km
-- for 1,500 kbit/s: approx. 2 km
Device types •• DP master class 1, e.g. central controllers such as PLC, PC, ...
•• DP master class 2, e.g. programming/configuration tools
•• DP slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 126
Fieldbus access •• Token-passing between masters and polling for slaves
•• Mono-master or multi-master systems are possible
Supported fieldbus functions Cyclic data exchange, sync mode, freeze mode, fail-safe mode
Profibus DP ident no. 0x0C77: Standard applications with Profibus DP-V0 and DP-V1

Commands and signals of the Profibus DP interfac

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command, motor speed
(command signals)
Process representation input •• End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) •• Actual position value
•• Selector switch in position LOCAL/REMOTE
•• Torque switches OPEN, CLOSED
•• Limit switches OPEN, CLOSED
Process representation input •• Motor protection tripped
(fault signals) •• Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
- Stop in current position
- Travel to end position OPEN or CLOSED
- Travel to any intermediate position
- Execute last received operation command

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2 000 m above seal level
> 2,000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection according to IP68
EN 60529 According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
•• Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
•• Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
•• Up to 10 operations during continuous immersion
•• Modulating duty is not possible during continuous immersion
Pollution degree according to IEC Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.987/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 3/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Profibus D
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

GL approval (option) Environmental categories D, G, EMC2

Corrosion protection Standard: KS Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Option: KX Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and
high pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 20,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED, at a
respective rotary movement of 90°.
Modulating 5 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number of
starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (2014/30/EU)
Low Voltage Directive: (2014/35/EU)
Machinery Directive: (2006/42/EC)
Reference documents Dimensions SGC 04.1– SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Electrical data SGC 04.1– SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.987/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 4/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Type Operating time for 90° Torque range1) Running Valve attach- Valve shaft Handwheel Weight4)
in seconds torque2)/ ment
(adjustable in 9 steps) Modulating
torque3)
Max. Max. Standard Cylindrical Square Two-flat Ø Turns approx.
50 Hz/60 Hz [Nm] [Nm] EN ISO 5211 max. [mm] max. [mm] max. [mm] [mm] for 90° [kg]
SGC/SGCR 04.1 4 – 63 25 – 63 32 F05/F07 20 17 17 100 13.5 7.0
SGC/SGCR 05.1 4 – 63 50 – 125 63 F05/F07 20 17 17 100 13.5 7.0
SGC/SGCR 07.1 4 – 63 100 – 250 125 F07 25.4 22 22 125 13.5 10
SGC/SGCR 10.1 5.6 – 90 200 – 500 250 F10 38 30 27 160 13.5 15
SGC/SGCR 12.1 20 – 275 400 – 1,000 500 F12 50 36 41 125 35 25

Notes on table
1) Unseating torque The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows increasing the pre-set torque to 130 %. This increase
only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period, allowing safer unseating of blocked valves.
2) Running torque Maximum permissible torque for 15 min. running time.
3) Modulating torque Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty
4) Weight Indicated weight includes part-turn actuator with controls, electrical connection in standard version, unbored
coupling and handwheel

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, classes A and B according to EN 15714-2
duty
SGC:
Modulating Intermittent duty S4 - 40 %, class C according to EN 15714-2
duty with maximum number of 1,800 starts per hour (option)
SGCR:
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at running or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44081)
Self-locking Yes
Swing angle Standard: SGC/SGCR 04.1 – 10.1: 82° – 98° adjustable between min. and max. values
SGC/SGCR 12.1: 75 ° – 105°
Options: Available swing angles on request
Limit switching Via position transmitter potentiometer, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE
Signalling via fieldbus interface
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE, adjustable in 8 steps
Signalling via fieldbus interface
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during electrical operation
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: •• Coupling unbored extended
•• Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
-- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
-- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
-- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Dimensions according to EN ISO 5211

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.203/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator controls

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 115 230
Hz 50/60 50/60

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data Part-turn actuators SGC/SGCR
External supply of the electronics 24 V DC +20 %/–15 %,
(option) Current consumption: With options up to 200 mA
The external power supply must have reinforced insulation against mains voltage in accordance with IEC
61800-5-1 and may only be supplied by a circuit limited to 150 VA in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics Power electronics with integral motor controller
Rated power Controls are designed for rated motor power, refer to Electrical Data Part-turn actuators SGC/SGCR
Control Operation commands and setpoint via fieldbus interface
(input signals)
Status signals Via fieldbus interface
(output signals)
Local controls Standard: •• Push buttons OPEN, STOP (LOCAL - REMOTE), CLOSE
•• 2 multi-colour indication lights:
-- End position CLOSED (yellow), fault/failure (red), end position OPEN (green),
operation mode LOCAL (blue)
Option: Local controls mounted separately on wall bracket
Functions •• Switch-off mode adjustable:
-- Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
•• Torque monitoring across the whole travel
•• Torque by-pass
•• Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
-- via fieldbus interface
-- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position OPEN
•• Positioner:
-- Position setpoint via fieldbus interface
-- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
-- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
-- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via fieldbus interface
Electrical connection Standard: Plug/socket connector with crimp connection
Option: Plug/socket connector with screw-type connection
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPCBC000-2A7-0540 TPA50R200-0A0-000

Settings/programming the Modbus RTU interface

Setting the Modbus RTU interface The Modbus address is set via switches (DIP switches in the actuator), alternatively also via parameters (using
AUMA Software CDT and AUMA service cable Z100.999). Parity and baud rate are set via parameters.

General data of the Modbus RTU interface

Communication protocol Modbus RTU according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784
Network topology Line (bus) structure. When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented. Coupling and uncoupling
of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible.
Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158
Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.203/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Transmission rate/cable length Line topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Possible cable length with
(segment length) without repeater (total network cable
repeater length):
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 10 km

Redundant loop topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Max. possible cable length of
between actuators redundant loop
(without repeater)
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 290 km

Device types Modbus slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 247
Fieldbus access Polling between master and slaves (query response).
Supported Modbus functions 01 Read Coil Status
(services)
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
15 (0FHex) Force Multiple Coils
06 Preset Single Register
16 (10Hex) Preset Multiple Registers
17 (11Hex) Report Slave ID
08 Diagnostics:
•• 00 00 Loopback
•• 00 10 (0AHex) Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register
•• 00 11 (0BHex) Return Bus Message Count
•• 00 12 (0CHex) Return Bus Communication Error Count
•• 00 13 (0DHex) Return Bus Exception Error Count
•• 00 14 (0EHex) Return Slave Message Count
•• 00 15 (0FHex) Return Slave No Response Count
•• 00 16 (10Hex) Return Slave NAK Count
•• 00 17 (11Hex) Return Slave Busy Count
•• 00 18 (12Hex) Return Character Overrun Count

Commands and signals of the Modbus RTU interface

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command, motor speed
(command signals)
Process representation input •• End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) •• Actual position value
•• Selector switch in position LOCAL/REMOTE
•• Torque switches OPEN, CLOSED
•• Limit switches OPEN, CLOSED
Process representation input •• Motor protection tripped
(fault signals) •• Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
- Stop in current position
- Travel to end position OPEN or CLOSED
- Travel to any intermediate position
- Execute last received operation command

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2 000 m above seal level
> 2,000 m above sea level on request

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.203/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 3/4

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1, Modbus RTU
Technical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C

Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection according to IP68
EN 60529 According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
•• Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
•• Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
•• Up to 10 operations during continuous immersion
•• Modulating duty is not possible during continuous immersion
Pollution degree according to IEC Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
GL approval (option) Environmental categories D, G, EMC2
Corrosion protection Standard: KS Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation,
and high pollution.
Option: KX Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation,
and high pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 20,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED, at a
respective rotary movement of 90°.
Modulating 5 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number of
starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (2014/30/EU)
Low Voltage Directive: (2014/35/EU)
Machinery Directive: (2006/42/EC)
Reference documents Dimensions SGC 04.1– SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Electrical data SGC 04.1– SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.203/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 4/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Type Output speed Torque Running Valve Valve shaft Stem Stem Handwheel Weight5)
rpm range1) torque2)/ attachment stroke diameter
Modulating
torque3)
for for
(adjustable in 9 Standard Cylindrical Square Two-flat rising valve rising valve Reduc-
steps) Max. Max. EN ISO max. max. max. stem4) stem4) Ø tion approx.
50 Hz/60 Hz [Nm] [Nm] 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] max. [mm] max. [mm] [mm] ratio [kg]
SVC/SVCR
1.6 – 22 10 – 25 13 F05/F07 20 17 17 60 23 100 13 : 1 7.0
05.1
SVC/SVCR
1.6 – 22 20 – 50 25 F07 25.4 22 22 70 26 125 13 : 1 10
07.1
SVC/SVCR
0.6 – 8.0 40 – 100 50 F07 25.4 22 22 70 26 125 13 : 1 10
07.5

Notes on table
1) Unseating torque The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows increasing the pre-set torque to 130 %. This increase
only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period, allowing safer unseating of blocked valves.
2) Running torque Maximum permissible torque for 15 min. running time.
3) Modulating torque Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty.
4) Rising valve stem For output drive type A
5) Weight Indicated weight includes globe valve actuator with controls, electrical connection in standard version,
unbored coupling and handwheel

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, classes A and B according to EN 15714-2
duty
SVC:
Modulating Intermittent duty S4 - 40 %, class C according to EN 15714-2
duty with maximum number of 1,800 starts per hour
SVCR:
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at running or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44081)
Self-locking Yes
Limit switching · Via position transmitter potentiometer, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE
· Turns per stroke: Available in subranges out of a total range between 1 – 40 (heed max. stem stroke).
However, the turns per stroke can only be set within the subrange ordered. More than 40 turns per
stroke on request.
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE, adjustable in 8 steps
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during electrical operation
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: · Coupling unbored extended
· Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Standard: With coupling, dimensions according to EN ISO 5211
Options: With output drive type A
With LE linear thrust unit
With GS worm gearbox

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.988/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator controls

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 115 230
Hz 50/60 50/60

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data Globe valve actuators SVC/SVCR
External supply of the electronics 24 V DC +20 %/–15 %,
(option) Current consumption: With options up to 200 mA
The external power supply must have reinforced insulation against mains voltage in accordance with IEC
61800-5-1 and may only be supplied by a circuit limited to 150 VA in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics Power electronics with integral motor controller
Rated power Controls are designed for rated motor power, refer to Electrical data Globe valve actuators SVC/SVCR
Control · 4 digital inputs (via opto-isolator, with one common)
(input signals) - Control voltage 24 V DC, current consumption: approx. 15 mA per input
- Minimum pulse duration for shortest operation pulse: 100 ms
- All digital inputs must be supplied with the same potential.
Assignment for open-close actuators:
- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE (standard)
- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, EMERGENCY (option)
- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, MODE in combination with positioner (option)
- OPEN, EMERGENCY, CLOSE, MODE in combination with positioner (option)
Assignment for modulating actuators:
- OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, MODE (standard)
- OPEN, EMERGENCY, CLOSE, MODE (option)
· Analogue input 0/4 – 20 mA (option)
Used as input signal for position setpoint E1 (in combination with positioner) or as input signal for motor
speed E3.
Status signals · Output contacts:
(output signals) 4 programmable semi-conductor output contacts, per contact max. 24 V DC, 1 A (resistive load)
- 2 NO contacts with one common
Default configuration: End position OPEN, end position CLOSED
- 1 potential-free NO contact for collective fault signal
Default configuration: Torque fault, motor protection tripped
- 1 potential-free change-over contact
Default configuration: Push button REMOTE
· Analogue output:
Galvanically isolated position feedback 0/4 – 20 mA (load 500 Ω).
Voltage output Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC, max. 40 mA for supply of control inputs, galvanically isolated from internal voltage
supply.
Not available for option "external electronics supply".
Local controls Standard: · Push buttons OPEN, STOP (LOCAL - REMOTE), CLOSE
· 2 multi-colour indication lights:
- End position CLOSED (yellow), fault/failure (red), end position OPEN (green),
operation mode LOCAL (blue)
Option: Local controls mounted separately on wall bracket

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.988/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Functions · Switch-off mode adjustable:

- Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
· Torque monitoring across the whole travel
· Torque by-pass
· Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
- Digital input low active,
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position OPEN
· Positioner (for modulating actuators):
- Position setpoint via analogue input E1 = 0/4 – 20 mA
- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via digital MODE input
Electrical connection Standard: Plug/socket connector with crimp connection
Option: AUMA plug/socket connector with screw-type connection
Wiring diagram (basic version) Open-close TPC B-0E6-2C7-0530 TPA 50R200-0A0-000
duty:
Modulating TPC B-1H6-2C7-0530 TPA 50R200-0A0-000
duty:

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2 000 m über NN
> 2,000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection according to IP68
EN 60529 According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
· Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
· Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
· Up to 10 operations during continuous immersion
· Modulating duty is not possible during continuous immersion
Pollution degree according to IEC Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
GL approval Environmental categories D, G, EMC2
Corrosion protection Standard: KS Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Option: KX Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and
high pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 20,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED
Modulating 5 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number of
starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.988/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 3/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Further information
EU Directives Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (2014/30/EU)
Low Voltage Directive: (2014/35/EU)
Machinery Directive: (2006/42/EC)
Reference documents Dimensions SVC 05.1– SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Electrical data SVC 05.1– SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.988/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 4/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Profibus D
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Type Output speed Torque Running Valve Valve shaft Stem Stem Handwheel Weight5)
rpm range1) torque2)/ attachment stroke diameter
Modulating
torque3)
for for
(adjustable in 9 Standard Cylindrical Square Two-flat rising valve rising valve Reduc-
steps) Max. Max. EN ISO max. max. max. stem4) stem4) Ø tion approx.
50 Hz/60 Hz [Nm] [Nm] 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] max. [mm] max. [mm] [mm] ratio [kg]
SVC/SVCR
1.6 – 22 10 – 25 13 F05/F07 20 17 17 60 23 100 13 : 1 7.0
05.1
SVC/SVCR
1.6 – 22 20 – 50 25 F07 25,4 22 22 70 26 125 13 : 1 10
07.1
SVC/SVCR
0.6 – 8.0 40 – 100 50 F07 25,4 22 22 70 26 125 13 : 1 10
07.5

Notes on table
1) Unseating torque The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows increasing the pre-set torque to 130 %. This increase
only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period, allowing safer unseating of blocked valves.
2) Running torque Maximum permissible torque for 15 min. running time.
3) Modulating torque Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty
4) Rising valve stem For output drive type A
5) Weight Indicated weight includes globe valve actuator with controls, electrical connection in standard version,
unbored coupling and handwheel

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, classes A and B according to EN 15714-2
duty
SVC:
Modulating Intermittent duty S4 - 40 %, class C according to EN 15714-2
duty with maximum number of 1,800 starts per hour
SVCR:
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at running or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44081)
Self-locking Yes
Limit switching •• Via position transmitter potentiometer, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE
•• Turns per stroke: Available in subranges out of a total range between 1 – 40 (heed max. stem stroke).
However, the turns per stroke can only be set within the subrange ordered. More than 40 turns per
stroke on request.
•• Signalling for fi eldbus interface
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE, adjustable in 8 steps
Signalling for fieldbus interface
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during electrical operation
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: •• Coupling unbored extended
•• Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
-- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
-- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
-- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Standard: With coupling, dimensions according to EN ISO 5211
Options: With output drive type A
With LE linear thrust unit
With GS worm gearbox

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.989/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Profibus D
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator controls

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC current
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 115 230
Hz 50/60 50/60

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data Globe valve actuators SVC/SVCR
External supply of the electronics 24 V DC +20 %/–15 %,
(option) Current consumption: With options up to 200 mA
The external power supply must have reinforced insulation against mains voltage in accordance with IEC
61800-5-1 and may only be supplied by a circuit limited to 150 VA in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics Power electronics with integral motor controller
Rated power Controls are designed for rated motor power, refer to Electrical data Globe valve actuators SVC/SVCR
Control Operation commands and setpoint via fieldbus interface
(input signals)
Status signals Via fieldbus interface
(output signals)
Profibus DP-V1 (option) Access to parameters, the electronic name plate and the operating and diagnostic services with acyclic write/
read services
Local controls Standard: •• Push buttons OPEN, STOP (LOCAL - REMOTE), CLOSE
•• 2 multi-colour indication lights:
-- End position CLOSED (yellow), fault/failure (red), end position OPEN (green),
operation mode LOCAL (blue)
Option: Local controls mounted separately on wall bracket
Functions •• Switch-off mode adjustable:
-- Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
•• Torque monitoring across the whole travel
•• Torque by-pass
•• Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
-- via fieldbus interface
-- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position OPEN
•• Programmable behaviour in case of loss of bus communication
•• Positioner:
-- Position setpoint via fieldbus interface
-- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
-- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
-- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via fieldbus interface
Electrical connection Standard: Plug/socket connector with crimp connection
Option: AUMA plug/socket connector with screw-type connection
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPCBA000-2A7-0540 TPA50R200-0A0-000

Settings/programming the Profibus DP interfac

Baud rate setting Automatic baud rate recognition
Setting the Profibus DP interface Setting of the Profibus DP address is performed via switches, alternatively also via parameters
Configurable process representation For an optimum adaptation to the process control system, the process representation can be configured as
via GSD file desired.

General Profibus DP interface dat

Communication protocol Profibus DP according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784-1
Network topology •• Line (fieldbus) structure.
•• When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented.
•• Coupling and uncoupling of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.989/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Profibus D
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158

Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)
Transmission rate/cable length •• Baud rate and maximum cable length (segment length) without repeater:
-- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: 1,200 m
-- for 187.5 kbit/s: 1,000 m
-- for 500 kbit/s: 400 m
-- for 1,500 kbit/s: 200 m
•• Baud rate and possible cable length with repeater (total network cable length):
-- between 9.6 and 93.75 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
-- for 187.5 kbit/s: approx. 10 km
-- for 500 kbit/s: approx. 4 km
-- for 1,500 kbit/s: approx. 2 km
Device types •• DP master class 1, e.g. central controllers such as PLC, PC, ...
•• DP master class 2, e.g. programming/configuration tools
•• DP slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 126
Fieldbus access •• Token-passing between masters and polling for slaves
•• Mono-master or multi-master systems are possible
Supported fieldbus functions Cyclic data exchange, sync mode, freeze mode, fail-safe mode
Profibus DP ident no. 0x0C77: Standard applications with Profibus DP-V0 and DP-V1

Commands and signals of the Profibus DP interfac

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command, motor speed
(command signals)
Process representation input •• End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) •• Actual position value
•• Selector switch in position LOCAL/REMOTE
•• Torque switches OPEN, CLOSED
•• Limit switches OPEN, CLOSED
Process representation input •• Motor protection tripped
(fault signals) •• Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
- Stop in current position
- Travel to end position OPEN or CLOSED
- Travel to any intermediate position
- Execute last received operation command

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2 000 m über NN
> 2,000 m above sea level on request
Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C
Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection according to IP68
EN 60529 According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
•• Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
•• Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
•• Up to 10 operations during continuous immersion
•• Modulating duty is not possible during continuous immersion
Pollution degree according to IEC Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
GL approval (option) Environmental categories D, G, EMC2

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.989/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 3/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Profibus D
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Corrosion protection Standard: KS Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Option: KX Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and
high pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 20,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED
Modulating 5 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number of
starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (2014/30/EU)
Low Voltage Directive: (2014/35/EU)
Machinery Directive: (2006/42/EC)
Reference documents Dimensions SVC 05.1– SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Electrical data SVC 05.1– SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.989/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 4/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Modbus RTU
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Type Output speed Torque Running Valve Valve shaft Stem Stem Handwheel Weight5)
rpm1) range torque2)/ attachment stroke diameter
Modulating
torque3)
for for
(adjustable in 9 Standard Cylindrical Square Two-flat rising valve rising valve Reduc-
steps) Max. Max. EN ISO max. max. max. stem4) stem4) Ø tion approx.
50 Hz/60 Hz [Nm] [Nm] 5211 [mm] [mm] [mm] max. [mm] max. [mm] [mm] ratio [kg]
SVC/SVCR
1.6 – 22 10 – 25 13 F05/F07 20 17 17 60 23 100 13 : 1 7.0
05.1
SVC/SVCR
1.6 – 22 20 – 50 25 F07 25.4 22 22 70 26 125 13 : 1 10
07.1
SVC/SVCR
0.6 – 8.0 40 – 100 50 F07 25.4 22 22 70 26 125 13 : 1 10
07.5

Notes on table
1) Unseating torque The “Torque by-pass” function (can be activated) allows increasing the pre-set torque to 130 %. This increase
only applies during actuator start for an adjustable time period, allowing safer unseating of blocked valves.
2) Running torque Maximum permissible torque for 15 min. running time.
3) Modulating torque Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty.
4) Rising valve stem For output drive type A
5) Weight Indicated weight includes globe valve actuator with controls, electrical connection in standard version,
unbored coupling and handwheel

Features and functions of actuator

Type of duty Open-close Short-time duty S2 - 15 min, classes A and B according to EN 15714-2
duty
SVC:
Modulating Intermittent duty S4 - 40 %, class C according to EN 15714-2
duty with maximum number of 1,800 starts per hour (option)
SVCR:
For nominal voltage and +40 °C ambient temperature and at running or modulating torque load. The type of
duty must not be exceeded.
Motor Variable speed, brushless motor
Insulation class F, tropicalized
Motor protection PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44081)
Self-locking Yes
Limit switching · Via position transmitter potentiometer, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE
· Turns per stroke: Available in subranges out of a total range between 1 – 40 (heed max. stem stroke).
However, the turns per stroke can only be set within the subrange ordered. More than 40 turns per
stroke on request
· Signalling for fieldbus interface
Torque switching Via electronic current measurement, status signals for directions OPEN and CLOSE, adjustable in 8 steps
Signalling for fieldbus interface
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during electrical operation
Coupling Standard: Coupling unbored
Options: · Coupling unbored extended
· Finish machining of coupling (standard or extended)
- Bore according to EN ISO 5211 with 1 keyway according to DIN 6885-1
- Square bore according to EN ISO 5211
- Two-flat according to EN ISO 5211
Valve attachment Standard: With coupling, dimensions according to EN ISO 5211
Options: With output drive type A
With LE linear thrust unit
With GS worm gearbox

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.206/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Modbus RTU
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Features and functions of actuator controls

Power supply Standard voltages:
1-phase AC
Voltages/frequencies
Volt 115 230
Hz 50/60 50/60

Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For current consumption, refer to Electrical data Globe valve actuators SVC/SVCR
External supply of the electronics 24 V DC +20 %/–15 %,
(option) Current consumption: With options up to 200 mA
The external power supply must have reinforced insulation against mains voltage in accordance with IEC
61800-5-1 and may only be supplied by a circuit limited to 150 VA in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
Overvoltage category Category III according to IEC 60364-4-443
Power electronics Power electronics with integral motor controller
Rated power Controls are designed for rated motor power, refer to Electrical data Globe valve actuators SVC/SVCR
Control Operation commands and setpoint via fieldbus interface
(input signals)
Status signals Via fieldbus interface
(output signals)
Local controls Standard: · Push buttons OPEN, STOP (LOCAL - REMOTE), CLOSE
· 2 multi-colour indication lights:
- End position CLOSED (yellow), fault/failure (red), end position OPEN (green),
operation mode LOCAL (blue)
Option: Local controls mounted separately on wall bracket
Functions · Switch-off mode adjustable:
- Limit or torque seating for end positions OPEN and CLOSED
· Torque monitoring across the whole travel
· Torque by-pass
· Programmable EMERGENCY behaviour
- via fieldbus interface
- Reaction can be selected: Stop, run to end position CLOSED, run to end position OPEN
· Programmable behaviour in case of loss of bus communication
· Positioner:
- Position setpoint via fieldbus interface
- Programmable behaviour on loss of signal
- Automatic adaptation of dead band (adaptive behaviour selectable)
- Selection between open-close duty and modulating duty via fieldbus interface
Electrical connection Standard: Plug/socket connector with crimp connection
Option: AUMA plug/socket connector with screw-type connection
Wiring diagram (basic version) TPCBC000-2A7-0540 TPA50R200-0A0-000

Settings/programming the Modbus RTU interface

Setting the Modbus RTU interface The Modbus address is set via switches (DIP switches in the actuator), alternatively also via parameters (using
AUMA Software CDT and AUMA service cable Z100.999). Parity and baud rate are set via parameters.

General data of the Modbus RTU interface

Communication protocol Modbus RTU according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784-1
Network topology Line (bus) structure. When using repeaters, tree structures can also be implemented. Coupling and uncoupling
of devices during operation without affecting other devices is possible.
Transmission medium Twisted, screened copper cable according to IEC 61158
Fieldbus interface EIA-485 (RS485)

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.206/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Modbus RTU
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Transmission rate/cable length Line topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Possible cable length with
(segment length) without repeater (total network cable
repeater length):
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 10 km

Redundant loop topology:

Baud rate (kbit/s) Max. cable length Max. possible cable length of
between actuators redundant loop
(without repeater)
9.6 – 38.4 1,200 m approx. 290 km

Device types Modbus slave, e.g. devices with digital and/or analogue inputs/outputs such as actuators, sensors
Number of devices 32 devices without repeater, with repeater expandable to 247
Fieldbus access Polling between master and slaves (query response).
Supported Modbus functions 01 Read Coil Status
(services)
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
15 (0FHex) Force Multiple Coils
06 Preset Single Register
16 (10Hex) Preset Multiple Registers
17 (11Hex) Report Slave ID
08 Diagnostics:
· 00 00 Loopback
· 00 10 (0AHex) Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register
· 00 11 (0BHex) Return Bus Message Count
· 00 12 (0CHex) Return Bus Communication Error Count
· 00 13 (0DHex) Return Bus Exception Error Count
· 00 14 (0EHex) Return Slave Message Count
· 00 15 (0FHex) Return Slave No Response Count
· 00 16 (10Hex) Return Slave NAK Count
· 00 17 (11Hex) Return Slave Busy Count
· 00 18 (12Hex) Return Character Overrun Count

Commands and signals of the Modbus RTU interface

Process representation output OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, position setpoint, RESET, EMERGENCY operation command, motor speed
(command signals)
Process representation input · End positions OPEN, CLOSED
(feedback signals) · Actual position value
· Selector switch in position LOCAL/REMOTE
· Torque switches OPEN, CLOSED
· Limit switches OPEN, CLOSED
Process representation input · Motor protection tripped
(fault signals) · Torque switch tripped in mid-travel
Behaviour on loss of communication The behaviour of the actuator is programmable:
- Stop in current position
- Travel to end position OPEN or CLOSED
- Travel to any intermediate position
- Execute last received operation command

Service conditions
Mounting position Any position
Installation altitude ≤ 2 000 m above seal level
> 2,000 m above sea level on request

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.206/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 3/4

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5, Modbus RTU
Technical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
for open-close and modulating duty

Ambient temperature –25 °C to +70 °C

Humidity Up to 100 % relative humidity across the entire permissible temperature range
Enclosure protection according to IP68
EN 60529 According to AUMA definition, enclosure protection IP68 meets the following requirements:
· Depth of water: maximum 8 m head of water
· Duration of continuous immersion in water: Max. 96 hours
· Up to 10 operations during continuous immersion
· Modulating duty is not possible during continuous immersion
Pollution degree according to IEC Pollution degree 4 (when closed), pollution degree 2 (internal)
60664-1
Vibration resistance according to 2 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Resistant to vibration during start-up or for failures of the plant. However, a fatigue strength may not be
derived from this. Not valid in combination with gearboxes.
GL approval (option) Environmental categories D, G, EMC2
Corrosion protection Standard: KS Suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent condensation, and high
pollution.
Option: KX Suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, permanent condensation, and
high pollution.
Coating Double layer powder coating
Two-component iron-mica combination
Colour Standard: AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037)
Option: Available colours on request
Lifetime Open-close 20,000 operating cycles OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN
duty: An operating cycle is based on an operation from CLOSED to OPEN and back to CLOSED
Modulating 5 million modulating steps
duty:
The lifetime depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the
modulating accuracy. To reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operating time, the number of
starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.

Further information
EU Directives Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC): (2014/30/EU)
Low Voltage Directive: (2014/35/EU)
Machinery Directive: (2006/42/EC)
Reference documents Dimensions SVC 05.1– SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Electrical data SVC 05.1– SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.206/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 4/4

2 Technical data Miscellaneous

Connectors

2. Technical Data
Miscellaneous
Connectors SGC/SGCR, SVC/SVCR Parallel interface 66
Connectors SGC/SGCR, SVC/SVCR Profibus DP, Modbus RTU 67

Corrosion protection
Types of corrosion protection 68
Corrosion protection KS in accordance with painting spec. P1.001 69
Corrosion protection KS in accordance with painting spec. P1.002 70
Corrosion protection KX in accordance with painting spec. P1.001 72
Corrosion protection KX in accordance with painting spec. P1.002 73
Corrosion protection KX-G in accordance with painting spec. P1.004 75

Painting specifications
Painting specification P1.001 77
Painting specification P1.002 78
Painting specification P1.003 79
Painting specification P1.004 80

Lubricants
Grease and oil quantities 81
Ambient temperatures/lubricant in the gear housing 84
SGC/SGCR, SVC/SVCR
Parallel interface
Technical data Connector

Phoenix connectors Power contacts Protective earth Control contacts

No. of contacts max. 2 (+3) 1 19

Designation 1, 2 (4, 5, 6) PE 1 – 19
Connection voltage max. 230 V (630 V) – 24 V (150 V)
Rated current max. 10 A (30 A) – 1 A (8 A)
Type of customer termina-
Crimp
tion
Connection diameter max. 1.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 1 mm²
Material - pin socket carrier Polyamide
Material - contacts Brass/gold

General information
Mating plugs used as connecting plug for the customer are called plug and socket assemblies. The plug and socket assembly is the interface to the
actuator.
Cable diameter Power plug (power sup- 2 – 14.5 mm
ply):
Signal connector 2 – 10.5 mm
(parallel interface):
AUMA article numbers Plug and socket assembly for power supply and parallel interface: Z100.935A
including:
6-pin K007.818A Power connector (1x) in KS (KX on request)
K007.814 Crimp contact (6x) [RC-5CS2000]
19-pin K007.819 Signal connector (1x) in KS (KX on request)
K007.816 Crimp contact (16x) [RC-67S2000]
K007.877 Crimp contact (2x) [RC-6ES2000]
K007.817 Crimp contact (1x) [RC-6FS2000]
Crimping pliers (for signal and power Phoenix designation: 4-arbor crimping pliers with digital display for turned contacts: RC-Z2514
connectors) AUMA article number: K008.074
Phoenix designation: 4-arbor crimping pliers for turned contacts: RC-Z2504
AUMA article number: K008.106
Crimping pliers settings
AUMA Phoenix designation Cross section Crimp arbor setting Locator
(RC-Z2514/RC-Z2504)
article number crimp contact [mm²] [mm]
(for signal and power connectors)
1.00 0.97
K007.814 RC-5CS2000 5
1.50 1.02
0.75 0.85
K007.816 RC-67S2000 7
1.00 0.88
0.75 0.85
K007.877 RC-6ES2000 9
1.00 0.88
0.75 0.85
K007.817 RC-6FS2000 9
1.00 0.88

Insertion and ejection tool Phoenix designation: Insertion and ejection tool for RC crimp contacts Ø 1 mm: RC-Z2494
(for signal and power connectors) AUMA article number: K008.107
Phoenix designation: Insertion and ejection tool for RC crimp contacts Ø 1.5 mm: RC-Z2274
AUMA article number: K008.108
Ready-made mating connectors
Phoenix designation Power connectors Signal connectors
with cables
cable length as desired in xxx cable length as desired in xxx
metres metres
Straight KC-03018EKC1xxx KC-01618EBK1xxx
90° angled KC-0301TEKC1xxx KC-0161TEBK1Axxx

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y005.471/003/en Issue 1.13 Page 1/1

SGC/SGCR, SVC/SVCR
Prof bus DP, Modbus RTU
Technical data Connector

Phoenix connectors Power contacts Protective earth Control contacts

No. of contacts max. 2 (+3) 1 5

Designation 1, 2 (4, 5, 6) PE 1–5
Connection voltage max. 230 V (630 V) – 24 V (60 V)
Rated current max. 10 A (30 A) – 1 A (4 A)
Type of customer termina-
Crimp Screw
tion
Connection diameter max. 1.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 0.75 mm²
Material - pin socket carrier Polyamide
Material - contacts Brass/gold

General information
Mating plugs used as connecting plug for the customer are called plug and socket assemblies. The plug and socket assembly is the interface to the
actuator.
Cable diameter Power plug (power supply): 2 – 14.5 mm
Signalstecker (Businter- 6 – 8.5 mm
face):
AUMA article numbers Connection set power supply and bus interface: Z107.125
consisting of:
6-pin K007.818 Power connector (1x) in KS (KX on request)
K007.814 Crimp contact (6x) [RC-5CS2000]
5-pin K007.885 Signal connector complete (1x) in KS (KX on request)
K007.884 Female contact complete (1x) in KS (KX on request)
Crimping pliers (for power connectors) Phoenix designation: 4-arbor crimping pliers with digital display for turned contacts: RC-Z2514
AUMA article number: K008.074
Phoenix designation: 4-arbor crimping pliers for turned contacts: RC-Z2504
AUMA article number: K008.106
Crimping pliers settings
AUMA Phoenix designation Cross section Crimp arbor setting Locator
(RC-Z2514/RC-Z2504)
article number crimp contact [mm²] [mm]
(for power connectors)
1.00 0.97
K007.814 RC-5CS2000 5
1.50 1.02

Insertion and ejection tool Phoenix designation: Insertion and ejection tool for RC crimp contacts Ø 1.5 mm: RC-Z2274
(for power connectors) AUMA article number: K008.108
Ready-made mating connectors
Phoenix designation Power connectors Signal connector (bus interface)
with cables
cable length as desired in xxx Cable length 15 metres with male and
metres female connectors at each end, respectively
made of plastic material
Straight KC-03018EKC1xxx K008.217
90° angled KC-0301TEKC1xxx K008.260

T or Y connector for bus interface Alternatively for bus interface: 1 connector (type T or Y) instead of to separate connectors (IN and OUT)
Used as additional intermediate component to maintain bus communication in case AUMA actuator is
switched off or disconnected from bus.
AUMA article numbers:
T connector: K008.456 (large)
K005.816 (small)
Y connector: K006.135

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y005.472/003/en Issue 1.13 Page 1/1

Types of corrosion protection
Technical description Types of corrosion protection

This overview accounts for atmospheric ambient conditions, but not for special chemical atmospheres, requiring
absence of aluminium or non-ferrous heavy metal, for example.

Corrosivity categories according to ISO 12944-2 and AUMA

EN 15714-2
Classification of environments Painting specification
Corrosion protection
(total film thickness)
Powder coating Wet paint
C1 (very low):
Heated buildings with clean atmospheres
N1.001
C2 (low): KN
(60 µm)
Unheated buildings and areas with low level of
pollution
C3 (medium):
Production rooms with high humidity and some
pollution. Urban and industrial atmospheres with N1.003
moderate pollution (140 µm)
C4 (high): KS
Chemical plants and areas with moderate salinity P1.001
(140 µm)
C5/C5-M (very high, marine): N1.008
Coastal and offshore areas with almost permanent (220 µm)
condensation, high salinity and high pollution
C5-I (very high, industrial): S1.008
Industrial areas with almost permanent condensa- KX (300 µm)
tion and aggressive atmosphere depends on product

CX (Extreme):
Offshore and industrial areas with extreme humidity, KX on request
high salinity and aggressive atmosphere

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.628/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

Corrosion protection
Technical description Corrosion protection KS with powder coating
in accordance with painting specif cation P1.001

This description applies to AUMA products with powder coating in accordance with painting specif cation P1.001.

Corrosion protection KS based on painting specification P1.001 is suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent conden-
sation, and high pollution. Corrosion protection includes the use of suitable material for outer parts and structure of the painting.

1. Materials
1.1 Outside fasteners (e.g. screws) are made of stainless steel with additional metallic surface protection.

1.2 Name plates are made of aluminium.

2. Surface treatment
2.1 After machining, steel parts are covered with metallic surface protection (except SQ/GS coupling and internal GS coupling
compartment)
2.2 Aluminium parts such as the handwheel are electrophoretically coated.

3. General information
3.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
3.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

4. Painting system
4.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
4.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm

4.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:

Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane.
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

5. Total f lm thickness (dry)

The average total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housing is 140 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no
impact on corrosion protection.

6. Notes
6.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyu-
rethane, polyamide and acrylic enamels).
We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet painting layer.
For this, the surfaces to be painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease, oily
dirt and dust.
6.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.714/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/1

Corrosion protection
Technical description Corrosion protection KS with powder coating
in accordance with painting specif cation P1.002

This description applies to AUMA products with powder coating in accordance with painting specif cation P1.002.

Corrosion protection KS based on painting specification P1.002 is suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent conden-
sation, and high pollution. Corrosion protection includes the use of suitable material for outer parts and structure of the painting.

1. Materials
1.1 Outside fasteners (e.g. screws) are made of stainless steel with additional metallic surface protection.
1.2 Name plates are made of aluminium.

2. Surface treatment
2.1 After machining, steel parts are covered with metallic surface protection (except SQ/GS coupling and internal GS coupling
compartment)
2.2 Aluminium parts such as the handwheel are electrophoretically coated.

3. General information
3.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
3.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

4. Painting system
4.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
4.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm
4.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:
Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane.
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

4.4 Finish painting

The finish painting is applied after device assembly and depends on the desired colour.

4.4.1 Housing parts are finish painted with:

Product: SikaCor EG 4
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey) or DB colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

4.4.2 Housing parts are coated with finish painting for special colours:
Product: SikaCor EG 5
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane
Colour: Special colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

5. Total f lm thickness (dry)

Average total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housings including finish painting is 200 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no
impact on corrosion protection.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y005.628/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/2

Corrosion protection
Technical description Corrosion protection KS with powder coating
in accordance with painting specif cation P1.002

6. Notes
6.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyu-
rethane, polyamide and acrylic enamels).
Subsequent finishing with chlorine rubber paints subject to restrictions.
We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet painting layer. For this, the surfaces to be
painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease, oily dirt and dust.
6.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y005.628/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 2/2

Corrosion protection
Technical description KX corrosion protection with powder coating
in accordance with painting specif cation P1.001

This description applies to AUMA products with powder coating in accordance with painting specif cation P1.001.

KX corrosion protection based on painting specification P1.001 is suitable for use in areas with extremely high salinity, almost permanent
condensation, and high pollution. Corrosion protection includes the use of suitable material for outer parts and painting system.

1. Materials
1.1 Outside fasteners (e.g. screws) are made of stainless steel with additional metallic surface protection.

1.2 The name plates are made of aluminium.

2. Surface treatment
2.1 After machining, the parts are coated with a metallic surface protection or are made of stainless steel (except for internal GS
coupling compartment).
2.2 Aluminium parts such as the handwheel are electrophoretically coated.

3. General
3.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
3.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

4. Painting system
4.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
4.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm

4.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:

Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

5. Total f lm thickness (dry)

The average total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housing is 140 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no impact
on corrosion protection.

6. Notes
6.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyure-
thane, polyamide and acrylic enamels). We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet paint-
ing layer. For this, the surfaces to be painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease,
oily dirt and dust.
6.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.641/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

Corrosion protection
Technical description Corrosion protection KX with powder coating
in accordance with painting specif cation P1.002

This description applies to AUMA products with powder coating in accordance with painting specif cation P1.002.

Corrosion protection KX based on painting specification P1.002 is suitable for use in areas with high salinity, almost permanent con-
densation, and high pollution. Corrosion protection includes the use of suitable material for outer parts and structure of the painting.

1. Materials
1.1 Outside fasteners (e.g. screws) are made of stainless steel with additional metallic surface protection.
1.2 Name plates are made of aluminium.

2. Surface treatment
2.1 After machining, steel parts are covered with metallic surface protection (except SQ/GS coupling and internal GS coupling
compartment)
2.2 Aluminium parts such as the handwheel are electrophoretically coated.

3. General information
3.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
3.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

4. Painting system
4.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
4.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm
4.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:
Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane.
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

4.4 Finish painting

The finish painting is applied after device assembly and depends on the desired colour.

4.4.1 Housing parts are finish painted with:

Product: SikaCor EG 4
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey) or DB colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

4.4.2 Housing parts are coated with finish painting for special colours:
Product: SikaCor EG 5
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane
Colour: Special colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

5. Total f lm thickness (dry)

Average total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housings including finish painting is 200 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no
impact on corrosion protection.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.716/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/2

Corrosion protection
Technical description Corrosion protection KX with powder coating
in accordance with painting specif cation P1.002

6. Notes
6.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyu-
rethane, polyamide and acrylic enamels).
Subsequent finishing with chlorine rubber paints subject to restrictions.
We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet painting layer. For this, the surfaces to be
painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease, oily dirt and dust.
6.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.716/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 2/2

Corrosion protection
Technical description KX-G corrosion protection with powder coating
in accordance with painting specification P1.004

This description applies to AUMA products with powder coating in accordance with painting specification P1.004

Corrosion protection KX-G based on painting specification P1.004 is suitable for use in areas with extremly high salinity, permanent con-
densation, and high pollution. Corrosion protection includes the use of suitable material for outer parts and painting system.

1. Materials
1.1 Outside fasteners (e.g. screws) are made of stainless steel with additional metallic surface protection.

1.2 Name plates are made of stainless steel.

2. Surface treatment
2.1 After machining, the parts are coated with a metallic surface protection or are made of stainless steel.

3. General information
3.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.

4. Painting system
4.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
4.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm

4.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:

Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

4.4 After product assembly, the first intermediate painting is applied to the housing parts:
Product: SikaCor EG 1
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component painting based on epoxy resin with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: Green (DB 601)
Film thickness: 80 µm (dry)

4.5 Finish painting

The finish painting is applied after device assembly and depends on the desired colour.

4.5.1 Housing parts are finish painted with:

Product: SikaCor EG 4
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey) or DB colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

4.5.2 Housing parts are coated with finish painting for special colours:
Product: SikaCor EG 5
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane
Colour: Special colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y009.211/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 1/2

Corrosion protection
Technical description KX-G corrosion protection with powder coating
in accordance with painting specification P1.004

5. Total film hickness (dry)

Average total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housings including finish painting is 280 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no impact
on corrosion protection.

6. Notes
6.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyure-
thane, polyamide and acrylic enamels). We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet paint-
ing layer. For this, the surfaces to be painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease,
oily dirt and dust.
6.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y009.211/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 2/2

Painting specif cation P1.001

Technical description Powder coating, primer coating and f nish coating

1. General information
1.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
1.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

2. Painting system
2.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
2.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm

2.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:

Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane.
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

3. Total f lm thickness (dry)

Average total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housing is 140 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no
impact on corrosion protection.

4. Notes
4.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyu-
rethane, polyamide and acrylic enamels).
We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet painting layer.
For this, the surfaces to be painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease, oily
dirt and dust.
4.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.477/001/de Issue 1.15 Page 1/1

Painting specif cation P1.002

Technical description Powder coating, primer coating, f nish coating and wet painting layer

1. General information
1.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
1.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

2. Painting system
2.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
2.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm

2.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:

Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane.
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

2.4 Finish painting

The finish painting is applied after device assembly and depends on the desired colour.

2.4.1 Housing parts are finish painted with:

Product: SikaCor EG 4
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey) or DB colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

2.4.2 Housing parts are coated with finish painting for special colours:
Product: SikaCor EG 5
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane
Colour: Special colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

3. Total f lm thickness (dry)

Average total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housings including wet painting layer is 200 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no
impact on corrosion protection.

4. Notes
4.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyu-
rethane, polyamide and acrylic enamels). Subsequent finishing with chlorine rubber paints subject to restrictions.
We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet painting layer.
For this, the surfaces to be painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease, oily
dirt and dust.
4.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.522/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/1

Painting specif cation P1.003
Technical description Powder coating, primer coating, f nish coating and
multi-layer wet painting

1. General information
1.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
1.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

2. Painting system
2.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
2.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm

2.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:

Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane.
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

2.4 After product assembly, the first intermediate painting is applied to the housing parts:
Product: SikaCor EG 1
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component painting based on epoxy resin with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: Green (DB 601)
Film thickness: 80 µm (dry)

2.5 The second intermediate painting is applied to the housing parts:

Product: SikaCor EG 1 (for data refer to 1st intermediate painting)
Colour: White
Film thickness: 80 µm (dry)

2.6 Finish painting

The finish painting depends on the desired colour.

2.6.1 Housing parts are finish painted with:

Product: SikaCor EG 4
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey) or DB colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

2.6.2 Housing parts are coated with finish painting for special colours:
Product: SikaCor EG 5
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane
Colour: Special colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

3. Total f lm thickness (dry)

Total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housings including wet painting layer is 360 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no
impact on corrosion protection.

4. Notes
4.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyu-
rethane, polyamide and acrylic enamels). Subsequent finishing with chlorine rubber paints subject to restrictions.
We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet painting layer.
For this, the surfaces to be painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease, oily
dirt and dust.
4.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.591/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/1

Painting specification P1.00
Technical description Powder coating, primer coating, finish coating and
multi-layer wet painting

1. General information
1.1 Housing parts made of GJL/GJS are blasted: Sa 2 ½ in accordance with EN ISO 12944-4.
1.2 Aluminium housing parts are not blasted.

2. Painting system
2.1 During preliminary treatment, housing parts are chemically cleaned and painted with an Oxsilan® conversion coating.
2.2 Housing parts are primer coated with:
Product: FREOPOX PE 1204A
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on epoxy resin.
Colour: RAL 7035
Film thickness: 70 µm

2.3 Housing parts are finish coated with:

Product: FREIOTHERM PU 4003M
Manufacturer: Emil Frei GmbH & Co. KG
Structure: Thermally hardening powder coating based on polyurethane.
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey)
Film thickness: 70 µm

2.4 After product assembly, the intermediate painting is applied to the housing parts:
Product: SikaCor EG 1
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component painting based on epoxy resin with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: Green (DB 601)
Film thickness: 80 µm (dry)

2.5 Finish painting

The finish painting depends on the desired colour.

2.5.1 Housing parts are finish painted with:

Product: SikaCor EG 4
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane with micaceous iron oxide
Colour: A0001, AUMA silver-grey (similar to RAL 7037 dust grey) or DB colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

2.5.2 Housing parts are coated with finish painting for special colours:
Product: SikaCor EG 5
Manufacturer: Sika Deutschland GmbH
Structure: 2-component finish painting based on polyurethane
Colour: Special colour according to work order
Film thickness: 60 µm (dry)

3. Total film hickness (dry)

Total film thickness (dry) of the powder coated housings including wet painting layer is 280 µm.
For reasons of geometry, powder coating thickness varies between 60 µm and 220 µm. Variation of film thickness has no
impact on corrosion protection.

4. Notes
4.1 The top coat can be painted with all common 1- or 2-component coating materials (i.e. artificial resin, epoxy resin, PVC, polyu-
rethane, polyamide and acrylic enamels). Subsequent finishing with chlorine rubber paints subject to restrictions.
We recommend verifying the compatibility of the paints before applying a new wet painting layer.
For this, the surfaces to be painted must be slightly ground and carefully cleaned, i. e. free of foreign substance, grease, oily
dirt and dust.
4.2 Mounting surface to the valve is powder coated.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y008.310/003/en Issue 1.18 Page 1/1

AUMA products

Technical data Grease and oil quantities

This data applies to1):

Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 – SA 48.1; SAR 07.1 – SAR 30.1; SA 07.2 – SA 16.2; SAR 07.2 – SAR 16.2
SA 07.2-UW – SA 16.2-UW; SAR 07.2-UW – SAR 16.2-UW
SAV 07.2 – SAV 16.2; SARV 07.2 – SARV 16.2
SAExC 07.1 – SAExC 16.1; SARExC 07.1 – SARExC 16.1; SAEx 25.1 – SAEx 40.1; SAREx 25.1 – SAREx 30.1
SAEx 07.2 – SAEx 16.2; SAREx 07.2 – SAREx 16.2
SAVEx 07.2 – SARVEx 16.2; SARVEx 07.2 – SARVEx 16.2
SAN 07.1 – SAN 25.1; SARN 07.1 – 25.1; SAN 07.2 – SAN 16.2; SARN 07.2 – SARN 16.2
SAI 07.2 – SAI 16.2; SARI 07.2 – SARI 16.2
Part-turn actuators SQ 05.2 – SQ 14.2; SQR 05.2 – SQR 14.2; SQEx 05.2 – SQEx 14.2; SQREx 05.2 – SQREx 14.2
SG 05 – SG 12; SG 05.1 – SG 12.1; SGR 05.1 – SGR 12.1; SGExC 05.1 – SGExC 12.1
SG 04.2 – SG 10.2; SG 03.3 – SG 05.3
SGM 04.1 – SGM 10.1; SGMR 04.1 – SGMR 10.1; SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1; SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1
Globe valve actuators SV 05.1 – SV 07.1; SVM 05.1 – SVM 07.5; SVMR 05.1 – SVMR 07.5; SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5; SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Worm gearboxes GS 50.3 – GS 250.3; GS 315 – GS 500; GS 630.3
Primary reduction gearing GZ 16 – GZ 40; GZ 630.3
Coaxial planetary gearing GP 10.1 – GP 30.1
Spur gearboxes GST 10.1 – GST 40.1
Bevel gearboxes GK 10.2 – GK 40.2
Linear thrust units LE 12.1 – LE 200.1
Multi-turn gearboxes GHT 320.3 – GHT 1200.3

Multi-turn actuators
SA 07.1/07.5 10.0/10.1 14.1/14.5 16.1 25.1 30.1 35.1 40.1 48.1
Qty dm 3 0.62 -0.03 0.93 -0.04 2.3 -0.1 4.5 ±0.1 11.0 ±0.2 16.0 ±0.2 29.0 +0.4 36.0 +0.4 56.0 +0.5
Weight kg2) 0.56 -0.03 0.84 -0.04 2.1 -0.1 4.1 ±0.1 9.9 ±0.2 14.4 ±0.2 26.1 +0.4 32.4 +0.4 50.4 +0.5
SA 07.2/07.6 10.2 14.2/14.6 16.2
F07 F10/G0
Qty dm 3 0.58 ±0.02 0.525 ±0.02 0.9 ±0.02 1.76 ±0.05 3.1 ±0.05
Weight kg2) 0.52 ±0.02 0,47 ±0,02 0.81 ±0.02 1.58 ±0.05 2.8 ±0.05

Part-turn actuators
SQ 05.2 07.2 10.2 12.2 14.2
Qty dm 3 0.7 ±0.02 0.7 ±0.02 1.3 ±0.02 1.7 ±0.02 1.8 ±0.05
Weight kg2) 0.63 ±0.02 0.63 ±0.02 1.17 ±0.02 1.53 ±0.02 1.62 ±0.05
SG 05 07 10 12
Qty dm3 0.3 0.3 0.52 0.8
Weight kg 2) 0.27 0.27 0.47 0.72
SG 05.1 07.1 10.1 12.1
Qty dm3 0.3 0.3 0.52 0.8
Weight kg 2) 0.27 0.27 0.47 0.72
SG 04.2 05.2 07.2 10.2
Qty dm3 0.09 0.14 0.30 0.52
Weight kg 3) 0.07 0.12 0.25 0.43
SG 03.3 04.3 05.3
Qty dm3 0.14 0.14 0.23
Weight kg 3) 0.12 0.12 0.19
SGM/SGC 04.1 05.1 07.1 10.1
Qty dm 3 0.11 0.11 0.24 0.40
Weight kg 3) 0.09 0.09 0.20 0.33

1) – 2) Refer to notes on page 3.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y003.176/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/3

AUMA products

Technical data Grease and oil quantities

Globe valve actuators

SV 05.1 07.1
Qty dm 3 0.14 0.30
Weight kg 3) 0.12 0.25
SVM/SVC 05.1 07.1/07.5
Qty dm3 0.11 0.24
Weight kg 3) 0.09 0.20

Worm gearboxes
GS 50.3 63.3 80.3 100.3 100.3 100.3 100.3 125.3 125.3 125.3
(52:1) (126:1) (160:1) (208:1) (52:1) (126:1) (160:1)
Qty dm3 0.1 0.3 0.4 1 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.3 1.65 1.65
Weight kg 2) 0.09 0.27 0.36 0.9 1.22 1.22 1.22 1.17 1.49 1.49
GS 125.3 160.3 160.3 160.3 160.3 200.3 200.3 200.3 200.3 200.3
(208:1) (54:1) (218:1) (442:1) (880:1) (53:1) (67:1) (214:1) (434:1) (864:1)
Qty dm3 1.65 3.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 6.6 6.6 8.1 8.1 8.6
Weight kg 2) 1.49 3 3.9 3.9 3.9 6 6 7.4 7.4 7.8
GS 200.3 250.3 250.3 250.3 250.3 250.3
(1 752:1) (52:1) (210:1) (411:1) (848:1) (1 718:1)
Qty dm3 8.6 12.2 14.4 14.4 14.7 14.7
Weight kg 2) 7.8 11 13 13 13.3 13.3
GS 315 400 500 630.3
Qty dm3 27.5 55.0 110.0 216.7
Weight kg 2) 25.0 50.0 100.0 195.0

Primary reduction gearing

GZ 30 35 40 40/16
Qty dm3 17.6 18.7 57.2 61.9
Weight kg 2) 16.0 17.0 52.0 56.3
GZ 630.3 630.3 630.3
(4:1/8:1) (16:1/32:1) (64:1/133:1)
Qty dm3 11.1 16.7 21.1
Weight kg 2) 10.0 15.0 19.0

Coaxial planetary gearing

GP 10.1/14.1 10.1/14.1 10.1/14.1 16.1 25.1 25.1 30.1 30.1
(2, 4:1) (3:1) (4:1) (4:1/8:1) (16:1) (4:1/8:1) (16:1)
Qty dm3 0.35 0.35 0.35 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.2 2.5
Weight kg2) 0.32 0.32 0.32 0.9 1.4 1.8 2.0 2.25

Spur gearboxes
GST 10.1 14.1/14.5 16.1 25.1 30.1 35.1 40.1
Qty dm 3 0.7 1.5 3.0 8.0 12.0 20.0 27.0
Weight kg2) 0.62 1.3 2.7 7.1 10.7 17.8 24.0

Bevel gearboxes
GK 10.2 14.2/14.6 16.2 25.2 30.2 35.2 40.2
Qty dm 3 0.25 0.6 1.0 4.0 14.0 20.0 22.0
Weight kg2) 0.22 0.53 0.9 3.6 12.5 17.8 19.6

Multi-turn gearboxes
GHT 320.3 500.3 800.3 1200.3
Qty dm 3 30.0 71.5 93.5 146.5
Weight kg2) 27 64.4 84.2 131.9

1) – 2) Refer to notes on page 3.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y003.176/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 2/3

AUMA products

Technical data Grease and oil quantities

Linear thrust units

LE 12.1-50 12.1-100 12.1-125 12.1-200 12.1-250 12.1-400 12.1-500 50.1-63 50.1-125 50.1-250
25.1-50 25.1-100 25.1-125 25.1-200 25.1-250 25.1-400 25.1-500
Qty dm3 0.10 0.13 0.16 0.28 0.36 0.54 0.65 0.26 0.41 0.65
Weight kg2) 0.09 0.12 0.15 0.26 0.33 0.50 0.60 0.28 0.38 0.70
LE 50.1-400 70.1-80 70.1-160 70.1-320 70.1-400 200.1-100 200.1-200 200.1-400 200.1-500
100.1-80 100.1-160 100.1-320 100.1-400
Qty dm3 1.09 0.52 0.88 1.48 1.79 1.71 2.80 4.92 6.11
Weight kg2) 1.01 0.48 0.81 1.37 1.65 1.58 2.58 4.53 5.63

Notes on tables on pages 1 and 2

1) This overview is not applicable for products with F21.
2) For r = approx. 0.9 kg/dm3
3) For r = approx. 0.83 kg/dm3

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y003.176/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 3/3

Actuators

Technical data Ambient temperatures/lubricant in the gear housing

Temperature range
Type Extreme low temper-
Normal (standard) Low temperature ature High temperature
List designation N L EL-60 H
Actuator Grease/
Version °C oil °C Grease °C Grease °C Grease
SA 07.2 – 16.2 Standard –40/+80 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 0/+120 F3
SA 07.2-UW – 16.2-UW Standard –30/+70 F15 – – – – – –
SAV 07.2 – 16.2 Standard –40/+70 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 – –
SA 25.1 – 48.1 Standard –40/+80 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 0/+120 F3
SA 25.1-UW – 30.1-UW Standard –30/+70 F15 – – – – – –
SA 07.2 – 16.2 With oil1) –25/+80 O9 – – – – – –
SAR 07.2 – 16.2 Standard –40/+70 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 0/+100 F3
SAR 07.2-UW – 16.2-UW Standard –30/+70 F15 – – – – – –
SARV 07.2 – 16.2 Standard –40/+70 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 – –
SAR 25.1 – 30.1 Standard –40/+70 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 0/+100 F3
SAR 25.1-UW – 30.1-UW Standard –30/+70 F15 – – – – – –
SAR 07.2 – 16.2 With oil 1)
–25/+70 O9 – – – – – –
SAEx 07.2 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
4 – 32 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAEx 07.6
45 – 180 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
4 – 11 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAEx 10.2
16 – 180 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
4 – 11 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAEx 14.2
16 – 180 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAEx 14.6 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAEx 16.2 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAVEx 07.2 – 16.2 Ex –30/+40 (+60) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAEx 25.1 – 48.1 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAEx 07.2 – 16.2 With oil1) –25/+70 O9 – – – – – –
4 – 45 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 07.2
63 – 90 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
4 – 45 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 07.6
63 – 90 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
4 – 32 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 10.2
45 – 90 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
4 – 11 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 14.2
16 – 90 rpm Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 14.6 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 16.2 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SARVEx 07.2 – 16.2 Ex –30/+40 (+60) F11 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 25.1 – 30.1 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SAREx 07.2 – 16.2 With oil1) –25/+70 O9 – – – – – –
Nuclear power
SAN 07.1 – 35.1 –25/+80 F11 – – – – – –
plants
Nuclear power
SARN 07.1 – SARN 35.1 –25/+80 F11 – – – – – –
plants
Nuclear power
SAI 6 – 100 –20/+80 F11 – – – – – –
plants
Nuclear power
SAI 07.2 – 16.2 –30/+80 F11 – – – – – –
plants
Nuclear power
SARI 07.2 – 16.2 –30/+60 F11 – – – – – –
plants
Nuclear power
SAN 07.2 – 16.2 –30/+80 F11 – – – – – –
plants
Nuclear power
SARN 07.2 – SARN 16.2 –30/+60 F11 – – – – – –
plants

1) Refer to notes on page 2.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y003.808/003/en Issue 3.17 Page 1/2

Actuators

Technical data Ambient temperatures/lubricant in the gear housing

Temperature range
Type Extreme low temper-
Normal (standard) Low temperature ature High temperature
List designation N L EL-60 H
Actuator Grease/
Version °C oil °C Grease °C Grease °C Grease
SQ 05.2 – 14.2 Standard –40/+80 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 0/+120 F3
SQR 05.2 – 14.2 Standard –40/+70 F15 – – –60/+60 F2 0/+100 F3
SQEx 05.2 – SQEx 14.2 Ex –30/+60 (+80) F15 –40/+60 F2 –60/+60 F2 – –
SQREx 05.2 – 14.2 Ex –30/+40 (+60/+80) F15 –40/+40 (+60) F2 –60/+40 (+60) F2 – –
SGC 04.1 – 12.1 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –
SGCR 04.1 – 12.1 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –
SGM 04.1 – 12.1 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –
SGMR 04.1 – 12.1 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –
SVC 05.1 – 07.5 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –
SVCR 04.1 – 12.1 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –
SVM 05.1 – 07.5 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –
SVMR 04.1 – 12.1 Marine –25/+70 O2 – – – – – –

Notes on table on page 1

1) With oil Mounting position: Perpendicular hollow shaft and bearing flange at the bottom stipulated

Lubricants:
F2 = Fuchs Discor R EP 000
F3 = Zepf AR 12 K
F11 = Fuchs Renolit LST
F15 = Shell Alvania 1029
O2 = Fuchs Unisyn SC 32
O9 = Oest SAE 75W-90

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y003.808/003/en Issue 3.17 Page 2/2

3 Electrical data Actuators

Basic Range 88

3-phase AC current
ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600 380 V/50 Hz 88
400 V/50 Hz 89
400 V/60 Hz 90

1-phase AC current
ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600 24 V/50 Hz 91
24 V/60 Hz 92
110 V/60 Hz 93
115 V/50 Hz 94
220 V/60 Hz 95

3. Electrical data
230 V/50 Hz 96

Actuators
Direct current
ED 25 – ED 50 24 V DC 97
EQ 40 – EQ 150 24 V DC 98

Smart Range 99

1-phase AC current
PF-M25 – PF-M100 100 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz 99
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 100 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz 100

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1 115 V, 230 V/50 Hz/60 Hz 101
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5 115 V, 230 V/50 Hz/60 Hz 102

Direct current
PF-M25 – PF-M100 24 V DC 103
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 24 V DC 104
ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 3-phase AC motors
380 V/50 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
15 18.8 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
15 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 25 25 25
30 21 1,000 0.12 0.12 0.96 S1 - 100 % F
70 3.1 500 0.02 0.02 0.95 S1 - 100 % E
15 18.8 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.96 S3 - 30 % F
15 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 50 50 50
30 21 1,000 0.12 0.12 0.96 S1 - 100 % F
70 3.1 500 0.02 0.02 0.95 S1 - 100 % E
15 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
15 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
30 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 40 40 20
30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
20 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
20 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
30 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 60 60 40
30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
20 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
30 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 100 100 60 30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
20 49 1,500 0.18 0.18 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 150 150 80
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
40 49 1,500 0.18 0.18 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
80 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 300 300 180
160 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
160 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
80 49 1,500 0.18 0.18 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
EQ 600 600 300
160 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min
5) Option: S1 - 100 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.066/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 3-phase AC motors
400 V/50 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
15 18.8 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
15 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 25 25 25
30 21 1,000 0.12 0.12 0.96 S1 - 100 % F
70 3.1 500 0.02 0.02 0.95 S1 - 100 % E
15 18.8 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.96 S3 - 30 % F
15 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 50 50 50
30 21 1,000 0.12 0.12 0.96 S1 - 100 % F
70 3.1 500 0.02 0.02 0.95 S1 - 100 % E
15 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
15 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
30 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 40 40 20
30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
20 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
20 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
30 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 60 60 40
30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
20 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
30 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 100 100 60 30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
20 49 1,500 0.18 0.18 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
30 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 150 150 80
60 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
60 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
40 49 1,500 0.18 0.18 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
80 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 300 300 180
160 18.8 1,500 0.10 0.10 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
160 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
80 49 1,500 0.18 0.18 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
EQ 600 600 300
160 36 1,500 0.11 0.11 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min
5) Option: S1 - 100 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.068/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 3-phase AC motors
400 V/60 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
12 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
12 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 25 25 25
25 19 1,200 0.10 0.10 0.96 S1 - 100 % F
59 3.1 600 0.01 0.01 0.94 S1 - 100 % E
12 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
12 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 50 50 50
25 19 1,200 0.10 0.10 0.96 S1 - 100 % F
59 3.1 600 0.01 0.01 0.94 S1 - 100 % E
12.5 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
12.5 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
25 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 40 40 20
25 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
50 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
16 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
16 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
25 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 60 60 40
25 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
50 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
16 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 % F
25 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 100 100 60 25 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
50 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
16 53 1,800 0.16 0.16 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
25 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 150 150 80
50 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
50 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
33 53 1,800 0.16 0.16 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
66 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 300 300 180
133 22.6 1,800 0.12 0.12 0.90 S3 - 30 % F
133 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 %5) F
66 53 1,800 0.16 0.16 0.90 S3 - 75 % F
EQ 600 600 300
133 38 1,800 0.10 0.10 0.90 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min
5) Option: S1 - 100 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.069/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 1-phase AC motors
24 V/50 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
15 5.1 375 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
ED 25 25 25 30 5.1 375 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
70 2.4 500 0.3 0.3 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
15 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
15 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 50 50 50
30 5.1 375 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
70 2.4 500 0.3 0.3 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
15 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
15 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 40 40 20 30 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
30 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 5.1 375 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
20 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
20 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 60 60 40 30 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
30 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % 5) F
60 5.1 375 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
20 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
30 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 100 100 60 30 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
60 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
20 35 1,500 2.8 2.8 ~1 S3 - 75 % F
30 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 150 150 80
60 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
60 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
40 35 1,500 2.8 2.8 ~1 S3 - 75 % F
80 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 300 300 180
160 15.7 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
160 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
80 35 1,500 2.8 2.8 ~1 S3 - 75 % F
EQ 600 600 300
160 30 1,500 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min
5) Option: S1 - 100 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.700/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 1-phase AC motors
24 V/60 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
12 5.5 450 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
ED 25 25 25 25 5.5 450 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
59 2.6 600 0.3 0.3 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
12 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
12 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 50 50 50
25 5.5 450 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
59 2.6 600 0.3 0.3 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
12.5 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
12.5 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 40 40 20 25 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
25 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 5.5 450 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
16 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
16 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 60 60 40 25 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
25 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 5.5 450 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
16 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
25 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 100 100 60 25 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
50 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
16 42.4 1,800 3.0 3.0 ~1 S3 - 75 % F
25 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 150 150 80
50 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
50 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
33 42.4 1,800 3.0 3.0 ~1 S3 - 75 % F
66 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 300 300 180
133 18.8 1,800 2.3 2.3 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
133 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
66 42.4 1,800 3.0 3.0 ~1 S3 - 75 % F
EQ 600 600 300
133 35 1,800 2.1 2.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min
5) Option: S1 - 100 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.050/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 1-phase AC motors
110 V/60 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
18 15.6 1,200 0.2 0.2 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
ED 25 25 25 36 3.1 450 0.6 0.6 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
84 2.6 600 0.1 0.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
18 19.5 1,200 0.4 0.4 0,98 S1 - 100 % F
ED 50 50 50 36 15.6 1,200 0.2 0.2 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
84 2.6 600 0.1 0.1 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
18 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 40 40 20 36 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
72 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
24 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 60 60 40 36 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
72 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
24 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 100 100 60 36 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
72 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
24 49 1,800 0.8 0.8 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 150 150 80 36 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
72 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
48 49 1,800 0.8 0.8 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 300 300 180 96 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
192 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
96 49 1,800 0.8 0.8 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 600 600 300
192 35 1,800 0.5 0.5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.063/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 1-phase AC motors
115 V/50 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
15 13,3 1,000 0,2 0,2 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
ED 25 25 25 30 2,7 375 0,1 0,1 0,99 S1 - 100 % E
70 2,4 500 0,1 0,1 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
15 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
ED 50 50 50 30 13,3 1,000 0,2 0,2 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
70 2,4 500 0,1 0,1 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
15 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 40 40 20 30 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
60 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
20 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 60 60 40 30 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
60 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
20 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 100 100 60 30 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
60 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
20 44 1,500 0,7 0,7 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 150 150 80 30 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
60 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
40 44 1,500 0,7 0,7 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 300 300 180 80 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
160 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
80 44 1,500 0,7 0,7 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 600 600 300
160 30 1,500 0,5 0,5 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.062/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 1-phase AC motors
220 V/60 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
12 5.5 450 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
ED 25 25 25 25 5.5 450 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
59 2.6 600 0.03 0.03 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
12 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
12 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 50 50 50
25 5.5 450 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
59 2.6 600 0.03 0.03 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
12.5 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
12.5 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 40 40 20 25 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
25 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 5.5 450 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
16 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
16 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 60 60 40 25 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
25 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 5.5 450 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
16 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
25 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 100 100 60 25 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
50 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
50 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
16 56.5 1,800 0.39 0.39 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
25 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 150 150 80
50 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
50 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
33 56.5 1,800 0.39 0.39 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
66 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 300 300 180
133 22.6 1,800 0.30 0.30 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
133 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
66 56.5 1,800 0.39 0.39 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 600 600 300
133 35 1,800 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min
5) Option: S1 - 100 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.065/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50, EQ 40 – EQ 600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with 1-phase AC motors
230 V/50 Hz

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range
Open-close Modulating
duty duty Operating time Nominal Max.
max. max. for 90° in Power1) Speed current2) current3) Insulation
[Nm] [Nm] seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] cos  Type of duty4) class
15 5.5 375 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
ED 25 25 25 30 5.5 375 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
70 2.4 500 0.03 0.03 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
15 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
15 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
ED 50 50 50
30 5.1 375 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
70 2.4 500 0.03 0.03 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
15 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
15 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 40 40 20 30 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
30 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 5.1 375 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
20 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
20 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
EQ 60 60 40 30 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
30 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 5.1 375 0.05 0.05 ~1 S1 - 100 % E
20 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
30 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
EQ 100 100 60 30 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
60 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
60 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
20 50 1,500 0.35 0.35 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
30 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 150 150 80
60 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
60 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
40 50 1,500 0.35 0.35 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
80 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F
EQ 300 300 180
160 18.9 1,500 0.28 0.28 ~1 S3 - 30 % F
160 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 %5) F
80 50 1,500 0.35 0.35 ~1 S3 - 50 % F
EQ 600 600 300
160 30 1,500 0.23 0.23 ~1 S1 - 100 % F

Notes on table
1) Power P Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.
The consumed electrical power can be calculated using the following formula: P = U x I x cos 
2) Nominal current IN Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time
3) Max. current Imax Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
4) Type of duty All actuators are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min
5) Option: S1 - 100 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.064/003/en Issue 1.17 Page 1/1

ED 25 – ED 50
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with DC motor
24 V DC

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range Operating time Operating time Power1) Speed2) Rated cur- Max. cur- Starting cur- Type of
for 90° for 90° rent3) rent4) rent duty5)
under no-load
condition
Open-close Modulating
duty duty
Max. Max.
[Nm] [Nm] in seconds6) in seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] IA [A]
6–7 6 13 3,500 0.8 0.8 4.0 S1 - 100 %
10 – 10 10 13 3,500 0.8 0.8 4.0 S1 - 100 %
ED 25 25 25
18 – 25 18 4.0 3,000 0.3 0.3 0.8 S1 - 100 %
60 – 61 60 2.0 1,900 0.2 0.2 4.0 S1 - 100 %
7–8 7 25 2,700 1.9 1.9 5.7 S4 - 50 %
10 – 12 10 17 3,000 1.3 1.3 4.0 S4 - 50 %
ED 50 50 50
18 – 21 18 18 3,600 0.5 0.5 4.0 S1 - 100 %
60 – 64 60 2.0 1,800 0.2 0.2 4.0 S1 - 100 %

1) Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.

2) Motor speed at maximum torque.
3) Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time.
4) Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
5) All actuator are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min. Number of starts: 600 cycles per hour.
6) Operating times may vary depending on the load.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.243/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

EQ 40 – EQ 150
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with DC motor
24 V DC

Part-turn actuator Motor

Type Torque range Operating time Operating time Power1) Speed2) Rated cur- Max. cur- Starting cur- Type of
for 90° for 90° rent3) rent4) rent duty5)
under no-load
condition
Open-close Modulating
duty duty
Max. Max.
[Nm] [Nm] in seconds6) in seconds P [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax [A] IA [A]
14 – 17 14 18 2,900 0.6 1.3 4 S4 - 50 %
EQ 40 40 20 22 – 27 22 18 2,900 0.6 1.3 4 S1 - 100 %
45 – 65 45 7.0 1,200 0.5 0.8 4 S1 - 100 %
14 – 18 14 20 2,600 1.2 1.5 4 S4 - 30 %
22 – 27 22 16 2,900 0.7 1.3 4 S4 - 50 %
EQ 60 60 40
45 – 65 45 7.0 1,200 0.6 0.8 4 S1 - 100 %
110 – 135 110 1.0 650 0.2 0.3 1.4 S1 - 100 %
14 – 19 14 32 2,700 1.8 2.1 5.7 S4 - 30 %
22 – 27 22 25 2,900 1.3 1.5 5.7 S4 - 50 %
EQ 100 100 60
45 –72 45 8.0 1,100 0.7 1.1 4 S4 - 50 %
110 – 135 110 1.3 608 0.2 0.4 1.4 S1 - 100 %
14 – 15 14 45 3,100 2.2 2.7 18 S1 - 100 %
22 – 30 22 29 2,700 1.5 2.1 5.7 S4 - 30 %
EQ 150 150 80
45 – 80 45 9.0 1,000 0.8 1.2 4 S4 - 50 %
115 – 162 115 1.5 488 0.2 0.5 1.4 S1 - 100 %
38 – 40 38 45 3,100 1.8 2.7 18 S1 - 100 %
EQ 300 300 180 70 – 90 70 24 2,800 1.2 1.6 5.7 S4 - 50 %
140 – 250 140 7.2 1,000 0.8 1.2 4 S4 - 50 %
75 – 80 75 45 3,100 1.8 2.7 18 S1 - 100 %
EQ 600 600 300
115 – 165 115 30 2,500 1.3 2.1 5.7 S4 - 30 %

1) Output of mechanical power at motor shaft at maximum torque of part-turn actuator.

2) Motor speed at maximum torque.
3) Rated current at maximum modulating torque and indicated operating time.
4) Current at maximum torque. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance with these values.
5) All actuator are also suitable for type of duty S2 - 15 min. Number of starts: 600 cycles per hour.
6) Operating times may vary depending on the load.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y007.560/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Electrical data Multi-turn actuators for classes A, B and C
Types of duty S2 - 15 min/S4 - 50 %, 100 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz, 1-phase AC current

General information
AUMA multi-turn actuators PF-M25 – PF-M100 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Output speed1) Torque range2) Modulating Power4) Nominal current5) Max. current6)
torque3)
Max. Max. PN 100 V 240 V 100 V 240 V
PF-M Power level [rpm] [Nm] [Nm] [W] IN [A] IN [A] IMax [A] IMax [A]
V2 1–6 31 0.5 0.2 1.0 0.5
25 10 – 25 12.5
V3 2 – 14 51 0.8 0.4 1.6 0.7
V2 0.5 – 3 32 0.6 0.3 1.1 0.5
50 20 – 50 25
V3 1–6 48 0.8 0.4 1.7 0.8
V2 0.5 – 1.5 32 0.6 0.3 1.1 0.5
100 40 – 100 50
V3 0.5 – 3 51 0.8 0.4 1.7 0.8

1) The values for output speeds refer to an operation at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque
2) Adjustable tripping torque
3) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty S4 - 50 %
4) Effective power consumed by the actuator at 35 % of maximum torque
5) Nominal current at 35 % of maximum torque and the fastest possible speed
6) Current at maximum torque and the shortest possible operating time

Notes on installation and sizing

Motor data Motor data is approximate. Due to usual manufacturing tolerances, there may be deviations from the values
given.
Mains voltage, mains frequency Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %
Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For protection with circuit breakers, the following sizing/characteristics are recommended.

Sizing/
Number of actuators Characteristics
1 B06
2 B10
4 C13
10 D16

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.095/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators for classes A, B and C
Types of duty S2 - 15 min/S4 - 50 %, 100 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz, 1-phase AC current

General information
AUMA part-turn actuators PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Operating Torque range2) Modulating Power 4) Nominal current5) Max. current6)
time for 90°1) torque3)
Max. Max. PN 100 V 240 V 100 V 240 V
PF-Q Power level [Seconds] [Nm] [Nm] [W] IN [A] IN [A] IMax [A] IMax [A]
V1 16 – 160 22 0.4 0.2 0.7 0.3
80 V2 8 – 80 32 – 80 40 33 0.6 0.3 1.1 0.5
V3 4 – 40 52 0.9 0.4 1.8 0.8
V1 32 – 320 22 0.4 0.2 0.7 0.3
150 V2 16 – 160 60 – 150 75 30 0.5 0.2 1.0 0.4
V3 8 – 80 52 0.9 0.4 1.8 0.8
V1 63 – 320 22 0.4 0.2 0.7 0.3
300 V2 45 – 320 120 – 300 150 30 0.5 0.2 1.0 0.4
V3 22 – 160 44 0.7 0.3 1.6 0.7
V2 75 – 320 30 0.5 0.2 1.0 0.5
600 240 – 600 300
V3 45 – 320 51 0.8 0.4 1.6 0.7

1) The values for operating times refer to an operation across 90° of travel at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque
2) Adjustable tripping torque
3) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty S4 - 50 %
4) Effective power consumed by the actuator at 35 % of maximum torque
5) Nominal current at 35 % of maximum torque and shortest possible operating time
6) Current at maximum torque and shortest possible operating time

Notes on installation and sizing

Motor data Motor data is approximate. Due to usual manufacturing tolerances, there may be deviations from the values
given.
Mains voltage, mains frequency Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %
Permissible variation of mains frequency: ±5 %
For protection with circuit breakers, the following sizing/characteristics are recommended.

Sizing/
Number of actuators characteristics
1 B06
2 B10
4 C13
10 D16

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.998/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

SGC 04.1 – SGC 12.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 12.1
Electrical data Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls
Short-time duty S2 - 15 min and intermittent duty S4 - 40 %, 115 V, 230 V/50 Hz/60 Hz

Electrical data for connection to 1-phase AC 115 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Type Operating time Torque1) Running torque2)/ Power Motor speed Rated current4) Max. current5) Starting
for 90° Modulating torque3) current6)
Max. Max. Max.
[Seconds] [Nm] [Nm] PN [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax.[A] IA [A]
SGC/SGCR 04.1 4 – 63 25 – 63 32 80 2,250 1.1 1.5 3,7
SGC/SGCR 05.1 4 – 63 50 – 125 63 120 2,250 1.6 3.0 3,7
SGC/SGCR 07.1 4 – 63 100 – 250 125 175 2,250 2.4 4.1 3,7
SGC/SGCR 10.1 5.6 – 90 200 – 500 250 225 2,250 3.2 6.0 3,7
SGC/SGCR 12.1 20 – 275 400 – 1,000 500 175 2,250 2.4 4.0 3,7

Electrical data for connection to 1-phase AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Type Operating time Torque1) Running torque2)/ Power Motor speed Rated current4) Max. current5) Starting
for 90° Modulating torque3) current6)
Max. Max. Max.
[Seconds] [Nm] [Nm] PN [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax.[A] IA [A]
SGC/SGCR 04.1 4 – 63 25 – 63 32 80 2,250 0.55 0.75 7,4
SGC/SGCR 05.1 4 – 63 50 – 125 63 120 2,250 0.8 1.5 7,4
SGC/SGCR 07.1 4 – 63 100 – 250 125 175 2,250 1.2 2.1 7,4
SGC/SGCR 10.1 5.6 – 90 200 – 500 250 225 2,250 1.6 3.0 7,4
SGC/SGCR 12.1 20 – 275 400 – 1,000 500 175 2,250 1.2 2.0 7,4

Notes on table
1) Torque Adjustable tripping torque
2) Running torque Permissible average torque in open-close duty S2 - 15 min
3) Modulating torque Maximum torque in modulating duty S4 - 40 %
4) Rated current Rated current at maximum modulating torque and shortest operating time
5) Max. current Current at maximum torque and maximum speed. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance
with these values.
6) Starting current The starting current circuit includes a capacitor. The starting current limit of this circuit amounts to 44 Ohm.
The indicated maximum values of the starting current occur during switching on when the AC voltage reaches
its peak amount.
230V 7.4 A
230V + 10% 8.2 A
115V 3.7 A
115V + 10% 4.1 A
These values are present for a very short period only when the capacitor is still discharged: less then 10 mil-
liseconds.

Motor data is approximate. Due to usual manufacturing tolerances, there may be deviations from the values given. The permissible variation of the
nominal voltage is ±10 %. Higher voltage failures cause reduction in nominal output torque.

The output data of the fuses to be provided on site must not exceed the following values:
15 A/250 V at a maximum mains current of 5,000 A AC.
For protection with circuit breakers, devices with 6 A at 230 V AC, or 13 A at 115 V AC with characteristics D according to VDE 0641 and IEC 60898
with at least 15 kA switching power are recommended.
Groups of up to four actuators can be protected via one circuit breaker with at least 15 kA switching power, 20 A at 230 V AC, or 40 A at 115 V AC,
characteristics D according to IEC 60898.

For further information, refer to "Technical data Part-turn actuators SGC/SGCR 04.1 – SGC/SGCR 12.1 with integral actuator controls".

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.976/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/1

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Electrical data Globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls
Short-time duty S2 - 15 min and intermittent duty S4 - 40 %, 115 V, 230 V/50 Hz/60 Hz

Electrical data for connection to 1-phase AC 115 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Type Output speed Torque1) Running torque2)/ Power Motor speed Rated current4) Max. current5) Starting
Modulating torque3) current6)
Max. Max. Max.
[rpm] [Nm] [Nm] PN [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax.[A] IA [A]
SVC/SVCR 05.1 1.6 – 22 10 – 25 13 225 2,250 3.2 5.0 3,7
SVC/SVCR 07.1 1.6 – 22 20 – 50 25 280 2,250 4.0 6.0 3,7
SVC/SVCR 07.5 0.6 – 8.0 40 – 100 50 175 2,250 2.4 4.0 3,7

Electrical data for connection to 1-phase AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Type Output speed Torque1) Running torque2) Power Motor speed Rated current4) Max. current5) Starting
Modulating torque3) current6)
Max. Max. Max.
[rpm] [Nm] [Nm] PN [W] [rpm] IN [A] Imax.[A] IA [A]
SVC/SVCR 05.1 1.6 – 22 10 – 25 13 225 2,250 1.6 2.5 7,4
SVC/SVCR 07.1 1.6 – 22 20 – 50 25 280 2,250 2.0 3.0 7,4
SVC/SVCR 07.5 0.6 – 8.0 40 – 100 50 175 2,250 1.2 2.0 7,4

Notes on table
1) Torque Adjustable tripping torque
2) Running torque Permissible average torque in open-close duty S2 - 15 min
3) Modulating torque Maximum torque in modulating duty S4 - 40 %
4) Rated current Rated current at maximum modulating torque and shortest operating time
5) Max. current Current at maximum torque and maximum speed. We recommend selecting the switchgear in compliance
with these values.
6) Starting current The starting current circuit includes a capacitor. The starting current limit of this circuit amounts to 44 Ohm.
The indicated maximum values of the starting current occur during switching on when the AC voltage reaches
its peak amount.
230V 7.4 A
230V + 10% 8.2 A
115V 3.7 A
115V + 10% 4.1 A
These values are present for a very short period only when the capacitor is still discharged: less then 10 mil-
liseconds.

Motor data is approximate. Due to usual manufacturing tolerances, there may be deviations from the values given. The permissible variation of the
nominal voltage is ±10 %. Higher voltage failures cause reduction in nominal output torque.

The output data of the fuses to be provided on site must not exceed the following values:
15 A/250 V at a maximum mains current of 5,000 A AC.
For protection with circuit breakers, devices with 6 A at 230 V AC, or 13 A at 115 V AC with characteristics D according to VDE 0641 and IEC 60898
with at least 15 kA switching power are recommended.
Groups of up to four actuators can be protected via one circuit breaker with at least 15 kA switching power, 20 A at 230 V AC, or 40 A at 115 V AC,
characteristics D according to IEC 60898.

For further information, refer to "Technical data Globe valve actuators SVC/SVCR 05.1 – SVC/SVCR 07.5 with integral actuator controls".

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y005.013/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/1

PF-M25 – PF-M100
Electrical data Multi-turn actuators for classes A, B and C
Types of duty S2 - 15 min/S4 - 50 %, 24 V DC, direct current

General information
AUMA multi-turn actuators PF-M25 – PF-M100 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Output speed1) Torque range2) Modulating Power 4) Nominal current5) Max. current6)
torque3)
Max. Max. PN
PF-M Power level [rpm] [Nm] [Nm] [W] IN [A] IMax [A]
V2 1–6 31 1.1 2.2
25 10 – 25 12.5
V3 2 – 14 51 1.8 3.7
V2 0.5 – 3 32 1.1 2.3
50 20 – 50 25
V3 1–6 48 1.7 2.9
V2 0.5 – 1.5 32 1.1 2.3
100 40 – 100 50
V3 0.5 – 3 51 1.8 3.9

1) The values for output speeds refer to an operation at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque
2) Adjustable tripping torque
3) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty S4 - 50 %
4) Effective power consumed by the actuator at 35 % of maximum torque
5) Nominal current at 35 % of maximum torque and the fastest possible speed
6) Current at maximum torque and the shortest possible operating time

Notes on installation and sizing

Starting current When charging capacitors, a starting current peak will occur for a short period. The current is limited to 3.4
A and will be present for maximum 20 ms.
Motor data Motor data is approximate. Due to usual manufacturing tolerances, there may be deviations from the values
given.
Mains voltage, mains frequency Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.427/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600
Electrical data Part-turn actuators for classes A, B and C
Types of duty S2 - 15 min/S4 - 50 %, 24 V DC, direct current

General information
AUMA part-turn actuators PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 are equipped with integral controls.

Type Operating time for Torque range2) Modulating Power 4) Nominal current5) Max. current6)
90°1) torque3)
Max. Max. PN
PF-Q Power level [Seconds] [Nm] [Nm] [W] IN [A] IMax [A]
V1 16 – 160 22 0.8 1.5
80 V2 8 – 80 32 – 80 40 33 1.2 2.4
V3 4 – 40 52 1.9 4.1
V1 32 – 320 22 0.8 1.5
150 V2 16 – 160 60 – 150 75 30 1.1 2.0
V3 8 – 80 52 1.9 4.1
V1 63 – 320 22 0.8 1.5
300 V2 45 – 320 120 – 300 150 30 1.1 2.0
V3 22 – 160 44 1.6 3.5
V2 75 – 320 30 1.1 2.2
600 240 – 600 300
V3 45 – 320 51 1.9 3.7

1) The values for operating times refer to an operation across 90° of travel at a load of 70 % of the maximum torque
2) Adjustable tripping torque
3) Maximum permissible torque for modulating duty S4 - 50 %
4) Effective power consumed by the actuator at 35 % of maximum torque
5) Nominal current at 35 % of maximum torque and shortest possible operating time
6) Current at maximum torque and the shortest possible operating time

Notes on installation and sizing

Starting current When charging capacitors, a starting current peak will occur for a short period. The current is limited to 3.4
A and will be present for maximum 20 ms.
Motor data Motor data is approximate. Due to usual manufacturing tolerances, there may be deviations from the values
given.
Mains voltage, mains frequency Permissible variation of mains voltage: ±10 %

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.428/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

4 Dimensions Actuators

Basic Range
ED 25 – ED 50 106
EQ 40 – EQ 150 108
EQ 300 – EQ 600 110
EQ 40 – EQ 600 with base and lever 112

Smart Range
PF-M25 – PF-M100 113
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 115
SGC(R) 04.1 – SGC(R) 10.1 / SVC(R) 05.1 – SVC(R) 07.5 117
SGC 12.1 / SGCR 12.1 119

4. Dimensions
Actuators
ED 25 – ED 50

Dimensions Part-turn actuators

h1
1)
H1

H2

H3

L max. 2)
P A
d4 x h2
A1 C2

A2 Ø d3

F07
F05
C1

F04

F03
C

Output drives according to EN ISO 5211

1) Dimensions for actuator with aluminium hood
2) Max. fitting dimensio Dimensions of couplings see overleaf
Dimensions ED 25 – ED 50
EN ISO 5211 F03 F04 F05 F07
A 55
A1 98
A2 166
C 131
C1 65
C2 50
H 190
H1 1) 220
H2 82
H3 16
L max. 2) 30
P 2 x M16 x 1.5
Ø d3 36 42 50 70
Ø d4 4 x M5 4 x M5 4 x M6 4 x M8
h 4
h1 12
h2 8 8 9 12
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.787/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 1/2

ED 25 – ED 50

Dimensions Couplings according to EN ISO 5211

Bore according to Dimensions ED 25 – ED 50

EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F03 F04 F05 F07
With keyway according to
ØD 24.8
DIN 6885-1

L5
b JS9 1) nach DIN 6885-1
"X" Ø d7 max. 15
Detail X d9 2) M4
L4 25
L5 2) 5
1,5 x d9
M 17
t 1) nach DIN 6885-1

Square bore Dimensions ED 25 – ED 50

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F03 F04 F05 F07
ØD 24.8
Ø d8 max. 18.1
L4 25
L6 min. 25
M 17
s H11 max. 14

Bore with two-flats Dimensions ED 25 – ED 50

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F03 F04 F05 F07
ØD 24.8
Ø d8 max. 18.1
L4 25
L6 min. 25
M 17
s H11 max. 14

1) Dimensions depend on Ø d7, refer to DIN 6885-1

2) Thread with grub screw

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.787/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 2/2

EQ 40 – EQ 150

Dimensions Part-turn actuators

h1
h3
N
Option:
KS1 compact connector

1)
H1
H

P
G

H2
ØD

H4
F
Lower edge of actuator

H3

L max. 2)
A3 d4 x h2
N1
Option: A Ø d3
A1
Local controls VSE
A2

G1
F10
F07

C4
C3
F05 M

F1

C2
Lower edge of actuator F04

C1
C
N2
Option:
Emergency operation module FSC20/
transformer housing PEL-DS
Ø D1
G2

F2

Lower edge of actuator

Output drives according to EN ISO 5211

1) Dimensions for actuator with aluminium hood
Dimensions of couplings see overleaf
2) Max. fitting dimensio
Dimensions EQ 40 – EQ 150
EN ISO 5211 F04 F05 F07 F10
A 98
A1 162
A2 169
A3 54
C 220
C1 183
C2 146
C3 131
C4 65
ØD 100
Ø D1 18
F 65
F1 53
F2 64
G 194
G1 180
G2 201
H 246
H1 1) 274
H2 133
H3 27.5
H4 63
L max. 2) 41
M min. 12.9 (~ -15°) Standard 19 (~ -90°) max. 25.1 (~ +15°)
N 144
N1 96
N2 188
P 3 x M20 x 1.5
Ø d3 42 50 70 102
Ø d4 4 x M5 4 x M6 4 x M8 4 x M10
h 4
h1 12
h2 8 9 12 15
h3 21
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.788/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 1/2

EQ 40 – EQ 150

Dimensions Couplings according to EN ISO 5211

Bore according to Dimensions EQ 40 – EQ 150 EQ 40 – EQ 150

EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F04 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10
With keyway according to
ØD 31.75 41.75
DIN 6885-1

L5
b JS9 1) nach DIN 6885-1
"X" Ø d7 max. 20 25.4
Detail X d9 2) M4 M5
L4 35 35
L5 2) 8 8
1,5 x d9
M 20 20
t 1) nach DIN 6885-1

Square bore Dimensions EQ 40 – EQ 150 EQ 40 – EQ 150

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F04 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 41.75
Ø d8 max. 22.2 28.2
L4 35 35
L6 min. 30 30
M 20 20
s H11 max. 17 22

Bore with two-flats Dimensions EQ 40 – EQ 150 EQ 40 – EQ 150

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F04 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 41.75
Ø d8 max. 22.2 28.2
L4 35 35
L6 min. 25 25
M 20 20
s H11 max. 17 22

1) Dimensions depend on Ø d7, refer to DIN 6885-1

2) Thread with grub screw

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.788/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 2/2

EQ 300/EQ 600

Dimensions Part-turn actuators

h1
h3
N
Option:
KS1 compact connector

1)
H1
H

P
G

H2
ØD

H4
F
Lower edge of actuator

N1
Option:

H5
L max.2)
Local controls VSE

H6
A
d4 x h2

G1
Ø d3
A2 Lorem ipsum
A1

F1
M
Lower edge of actuator
F10
N2

C4
Option:

Ø d1
C3
C2
F07
Emergency operation module FSC20/

C1
C
transformer housing PEL-DS
G2

Ø d2
F2 A3

Lower edge of actuator

Ø D1

M
Ø d1
F12

Ø d2

Output drives according to EN ISO 5211

1) Dimensions for actuator with aluminium hood Dimensions of couplings see overleaf
2) Max. fitting dimensio
Dimensions EQ 300 – EQ 600
EN ISO 5211 F07 F10 F12
A 98
A1 162
A2 169
A3 54
C 220
C1 183
C2 146
C3 131
C4 65
ØD 100
Ø D1 18
F 65
F1 53
F2 64
G 194
G1 180
G2 201
H 246
H1 1) 274
H2 133
H4 63
H5 103
H6 38.5
L max. 2) 50
M min. -3 (~ -15°) Standard 12 (~ 90°) max. 27 (~ +15°)
N 144
N1 96
N2 188
P 3 x M20 x 1.5
Ø d1 178
Ø d2 150
Ø d3 70 102 125
Ø d4 4 x M8 4 x M10 4 x M12
h 4
h1 12
h2 12 15 20
h3 21
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.789/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 1/2

EQ 300/EQ 600

Dimensions Couplings according to EN ISO 5211

Bore according to Dimensions EQ 300/EQ 600

EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F07 F10 F12
With keyway according to
ØD 51.75
DIN 6885-1

L5
b JS9 1) nach DIN 6885-1
"X" Ø d7 max. 38
Detail X d9 2) M6
L4 45
L5 2) 10
1,5 x d9
M 30
t 1) nach DIN 6885-1

Square bore Dimensions EQ 300/EQ 600

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F07 F10 F12
ØD 51.75
Ø d8 max. 40.2 3)
L4 45
L6 min. 30
M 30
s H11 max. 30 3)

Bore with two-flats Dimensions EQ 300/EQ 600

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F07 F10 F12
ØD 51.75
Ø d8 max. 36.2
L4 45
L6 min. 25
M 30
s H11 max. 27

1) Dimensions depend on Ø d7, refer to DIN 6885-1

2) Thread with grub screw
3) According to DIN 79

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.789/003/en Issue 1.20 Page 2/2

EQ 40 – EQ 600

Dimensions Part-turn actuators with base and lever

B2
EQ 40 – EQ 150 EQ 300/EQ 600 B1
with base and lever with base and lever

B2
B1

B B

Ø d1

Ø d1
Ø d2

Ø d2
H

H
H2

H2
H1

H1
h

h
h2

h2
h1

h1
C1 Ø d3 C1 Ø d3
C M C M
tapered hole 1:10

tapered hole 1:10

h3

h3
h1

h1
tapered hole 1:10

tapered hole 1:10

M1 M1
M2 M2

For missing dimensions, refer to Dimensions EQ Part-turn actuators in standard version

Dimensions EQ 40 – EQ 150 EQ 300/EQ 600
B 180 180
B1 80 80
B2 230 230
C 90 90
C1 20 20
H 160 160
H1 40 40
H2 140 140
M 100 100
M1 150 150
M2 200 200
Ø d1 14 15
Ø d2 14 15
Ø d3 H8 16 16
h 24 24
h1 20 20
h2 32 32
h3 13 –
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.790/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/1

PF-M25 – PF-M100

Dimensions Multi-turn actuators with integral controls

A2 A3
Space required for mounting/removal
A1
A5

HH
Option:
Handwheel

H2

H6 1)
H5

H4
H3
H1
“X“

E1 J
P
Ø d3 z x d4 x h1 E2

Ø d1 E3

F
Valve attachment according to EN ISO 5211
Dimensions of couplings see overleaf
C

Detail X
A7
A6
C1

C2
A4

L max.
Ø D2 Ø D3
C3

B Ø D4
Ø D1
1) Option: Dimensions incl. mechanical position indicator
2) For coupling with square bore, bore with two flat
Dimensions M25 M50 M100
EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10
A1 14.5 14.5 14.5
A2 32 32 32
A3 52 52 52
A4 35.5 35.5 48
A5 51.5 51.5 51.5
A6 101 101 101
A7 99 99 99
B 160 160 160
C 79 79 79
C1 141 141 141
C2 188 188 198
C3 47 47 60
Ø D1 100 100 160
Ø D2 47 47 47
Ø D3 24 24 24
Ø D4 15 15 20
E1 71 71 71
E2 97 97 97
E3 104 104 104
F 158 158 158
H1 57 57 88
H2 287 287 323
H3 97 97 133
H4 135 135 171
H5 156 156 192
H6 1) 189 189 225
HH min. 100 100 100
J 76 76 88
L max. 38 2)/40 38 2)/40 50
P 3 x M20 x 1.5 3 x M20 x 1.5 3 x M20 x 1.5
Ø d1 122 122 122
Ø d3 50 70 102 50 70 102 70 102
d4 M6 M8 M10 M6 M8 M10 M8 M10
h1 12 15 18 12 15 18 15 18
z 4 4 4
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y008.916/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/2

PF-M25 – PF-M100

Dimensions Couplings according to EN ISO 5211, DIN 6885

Bore according to Dimensions M25 M50 M100

EN ISO 5211 with keyway
according to DIN 6885-1 EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 31.75 51.75

L5
b JS9 1) According to DIN 6885-1
"X" Ø d7 max. 20 20 38
Detail X d9 2) M4 M4 M6
L4 35 35 45
L5 2) 8 8 10
1,5 x d9
M 20 20 30
t 1) According to DIN 6885-1

Square bore Dimensions M25 M50 M100

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 31.75 51.75
Ø d8 max. 22.2 22.2 40.2 3)
L4 35 35 45
L6 min. 30 30 30
M 20 20 30
s H11 max. 17 17 30 3)

Two-flat Dimensions M25 M50 M100

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 31.75 51.75
Ø d8 max. 22.2 22.2 36.2
L4 35 35 45
L6 min. 25 25 25
M 20 20 30
s H11 max. 17 17 27

Mounting position of the coupling within fitting X max. 3 3 4.5

dimensions Y max. 2 2 4.5
according to AUMA definition
X
Y

1) Dimensions depend on Ø d7, refer to DIN 6885-1

2) Thread with grub screw
3) According to DIN 79

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y008.916/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/2

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Dimensions Part-turn actuators with integral controls

A2 A3
Space required for mounting/
A1
removal A5

HH
Option:
Handwheel

H2

H6 1)
H5

H4
H3
H1
“X“

E1 J
P
Ø d3 z x d4 x h1 E2

Ø d1 E3

F
Valve attachment according to EN ISO 5211
Dimensions of couplings see overleaf
C

Detail X
A7
A6
C1

C2
A4

L max.
Ø D2 Ø D3
C3

B Ø D4
Ø D1
1) Option: Dimensions incl. mechanical position indicator
2) For coupling with square bore, bore with two flat
Dimensions Q80 Q150 Q300 Q600
EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10 F07 F10
A1 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5
A2 32 32 32 32
A3 52 52 52 52
A4 35.5 35.5 48 48
A5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5
A6 101 101 101 101
A7 99 99 99 99
B 160 160 160 160
C 79 79 79 79
C1 141 141 141 141
C2 188 188 198 198
C3 47 47 60 60
Ø D1 100 100 160 160
Ø D2 47 47 47 47
Ø D3 24 24 24 24
Ø D4 15 15 20 20
E1 71 71 71 71
E2 97 97 97 97
E3 104 104 104 104
F 158 158 158 158
H1 57 57 88 88
H2 287 287 323 323
H3 97 97 133 133
H4 135 135 171 171
H5 156 156 192 192
H6 1) 189 189 225 225
HH min. 100 100 100 100
J 76 76 88 88
L max. 38 2)/40 38 2)/40 50 50
P 3 x M20 x 1,5 3 x M20 x 1,5 3 x M20 x 1,5 3 x M20 x 1,5
Ø d1 122 122 122 122
Ø d3 50 70 102 50 70 102 70 102 70 102
d4 M6 M8 M10 M6 M8 M10 M8 M10 M8 M10
h1 12 15 18 12 15 18 15 18 15 18
Z 4 4 4 4
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y008.915/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 1/2

PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Dimensions Couplings according to EN ISO 5211, DIN 6885

Bore according to Dimensions Q80 Q150 Q300 Q600

EN ISO 5211 with keyway
according to DIN 6885-1 EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 31.75 51.75 51.75

L5
b JS9 1) According to DIN 6885-1
"X" Ø d7 max. 20 20 38 38
Detail X d9 2) M4 M4 M6 M6
L4 35 35 45 45
L5 2) 8 8 10 10
1,5 x d9
M 20 20 30 30
t 1) According to DIN 6885-1

Square bore Dimensions Q80 Q150 Q300 Q600

according to EN
ISO 5211 EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 31.75 51.75 51.75
Ø d8 max. 22.2 22.2 40.2 3) 40.2 3)
L4 35 35 45 45
L6 min. 30 30 30 30
M 20 20 30 30
s H11 max. 17 17 30 3) 30 3)

Two-flat Dimensions Q80 Q150 Q300 Q600

according to EN ISO 5211
EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F10 F05 F07 F10 F07 F10 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 31.75 51.75 51.75
Ø d8 max. 22.2 22.2 36.2 36.2
L4 35 35 45 45
L6 min. 25 25 25 25
M 20 20 30 30
s H11 max. 17 17 27 27

Mounting position of the coupling within fitting X max. 3 4.5

dimensions Y max. 2 4.5
according to AUMA definition
X
Y

1) Dimensions depend on Ø d7, refer to DIN 6885-1

2) Thread with grub screw
3) According to DIN 79

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y008.915/003/en Issue 1.19 Page 2/2

SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Dimensions Part-turn/globe valve actuators with integral actuator controls

C6

Space required for removal C1

C C2
F F
HH

H6
Bayonet variant
Plug/socket connector (option)

H2
H3
E2

H1
H8

h1
”X”
H5

H5
H7
H4

AUMA plug/socket z x d4
A3 connector variant (option)
E1 Ø d3
Ø d1
B1
E1
E
20° Screw-type 20°
connector variant (standard)

Detail X
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5
SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5 Y version
A1 with spigot

L max.
C5
C4

h
C3

Ø d7
Valve attachment according to
Ø d2 EN ISO 5211
Ø D1
Dimensions of couplings see overleaf

SGC/SGCR 04.1/SGC/SGCR 05.1 SGC/SGCR 07.1

Dimensions SGC(R) 10.1
SVC/SVCR 05.1 SVC/SVCR 07.1/SVC/SVCR 07.5
EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F07 F10
A1 53.5 66.5 82.5
A3 80 80 80
B1 77 95 111
C 144 155 155
C1 199 210 210
C2 87 99 114
C3 47 47 60
C4 140 150 –
C5 138 153 174
C6 299 310 310
Ø D1 100 125 160
E 125 135 135
E1 90 100 115
E2 115 115 115
F 100 123 152
H1 84.5 101.5 111
H2 194 219 244
H3 165 190 190
H4 144 144 144
H5 4 10 17
H6 20 23 24
H7 81 81 81
H8 62.5 67.5 67.5
HH min. 30 30 30
L max. 40 50 60
Ø d1 90 90 125
Ø d2 f8 35 55 55 70
Ø d3 50 70 70 102
d4 M6 M8 M8 M10
Ø d7 15 15 20
h 3 3 3
h1 12 15 15 14
z 4 4 4
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y005.021/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 1/2

SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1/SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5/SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Dimensions Couplings according to EN ISO 5211, DIN 6885

Bore according to SGC(R) 04.1/SGC(R) 05.1 SGC(R) 07.1

Dimensions SGC(R) 10.1
EN ISO 5211 SVC(R) 05.1 SVC(R) 07.1/SVC(R) 07.5
With keyway according EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F07 F10
to DIN 6885-1

L5
ØD 31.75 41.75 51.75
Detail X b JS9 1) 6 6 8
Detail X Ø d7 H8 2) 18 22 28
Ø d7 max. 20 25.4 38
d9 3) M4 M5 M6
1,5 x d9 L4 35 35 45
L5 3) 8 8 10
M 20 20 35
t 1) 20.8 24.8 31.3

Square bore SGC(R) 04.1/SGC(R) 05.1 SGC(R) 07.1

Dimensions SGC(R) 10.1
SVC(R) 05.1 SVC(R) 07.1/SVC(R) 07.5
according to EN ISO 5211 EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 41.75 51.75
Ø d8 min. 2) 18.1 22.2 28.2
Ø d8 max. 22.2 28.2 40.2 4)
L4 35 35 45
L6 min. 30 30 30
M 20 20 35
s H11 2) 14 17 22
s H11 max. 17 22 30 4)

Bore with two-flats SGC(R) 04.1/SGC(R) 05.1 SGC(R) 07.1

Dimensions SGC(R) 10.1
SVC(R) 05.1 SVC(R) 07.1/SVC(R) 07.5
according to EN ISO 5211 EN ISO 5211 F05 F07 F07 F10
ØD 31.75 41.75 51.75
Ø d8 min. 2) 18.1 22.2 28.2
Ø d8 max. 22.2 28.2 36.2
L4 35 35 45
L6 min. 25 25 25
M 20 20 35
s H11 2) 14 17 22
s H11 max. 17 22 27

Mounting position of coupling X max. 2.5 3.5

Y max. 6 10
X
Y

1) Dimensions depend on Ø d7, refer to DIN 6885-1

2) Recommended size according to EN ISO 5211
3) Thread with grub screw
4) According to DIN 79

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y005.021/003/en Issue 1.15 Page 2/2

SGC 12.1/SGCR 12.1

Dimensions Part-turn actuators with integral actuator controls

C6
C1
Space required for removal C C2

Bayonet variant †F †F

H6
Plug/socket connector (option)
HH

H2
H3
E2

H1
H5

H5
A3

H8
H7
H4

AUMA plug/socket
connector variant (option)

h1
1)
"X"

h
E1 Ø d5
Screw-type
20° connector variant (standard) Ø d2
B1
Ø d3 z x d4
E
Ø d1

Detail X E1

J
20°

A1 Valve attachment according to EN ISO

L max.

5211
C5

Dimensions of couplings see overleaf

C3

Ø d7
h 1)

Ø D1

1) Allowance for spigot is not available as standard The spigot ring is a separate component, available as option.
Dimensions SGC/SGCR 12.1
EN ISO 5211 F12 F14 F16
A1 66.5
A3 80
B1 94.5
C 155
C1 210
C2 99
C3 47
C5 150
C6 310
Ø D1 125
E 135
E1 100
E2 115
F 123
H1 101.5
H2 219
H3 190
H4 144
H5 10
H6 23
H7 81
H8 394 434 444
HH min. 30
J 109
L max. 61 101 111
Ø d1 150 175 210
Ø d2 f8 85 100 130
Ø d3 125 140 165
d4 M12 M16 M20
Ø d5 210
Ø d7 15
h 1) 2.5 3.5 4.5
h1 22 25 32
z 4
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.622/003/en Issue 1.14 Page 1/2

SGC 12.1/SGCR 12.1

Dimensions Couplings according to EN ISO 5211, DIN 6885

Bore according to
Dimensions SGC/SGCR 12.1
EN ISO 5211
With keyway according to EN ISO 5211 F12 F14 F16
DIN 6885-1 ØD 67.6

L5
b JS9 1) 10
Detail X Ø d7 H8 2) 36
Detail X Ø d7 max. 50
d9 3) M6
1,5 x d9
L4 55 95 105
L5 3) 10
M 40
t 1) 39.3

Square bore
Dimensions SGC/SGCR 12.1

according to EN ISO 5211 EN ISO 5211 F12 F14 F16

ØD 67.6
Ø d8 min. 2) 36.2
Ø d8 max. 48.2
L4 55 95 105
L6 min. 30 30 40
M 40
s H11 2) 27
s H11 max. 36

Bore with two-flats

Dimensions SGC/SGCR 12.1

according to EN ISO 5211 EN ISO 5211 F12 F14 F16

ØD 67.6
Ø d8 min. 2) 36.2
Ø d8 max. 48.2 (48 5))
L4 55 95 105
L6 min. 30 30 40
M 40
s H11 2) 27
s H11 max. 36 (41 5))

Mounting position of coupling X max. 5 8

Y max. 10 10
X
Y

1) Dimensions depend on Ø d7, refer to DIN 6885-1

2) Recommended size according to EN ISO 5211
3) Thread with grub screw
4) According to DIN 79
5) According to DIN 475

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.622/003/en Issue 1.14 Page 2/2

5 Dimensions Output drive types

Valve attachments for actuators and gearboxes 122

Couplings for SG/SV/SQ/PF/GS/GHE/FQM

Couplings (standard), bore with keyway according to DIN 6885-1 124
Couplings (standard), two-flat bore according to EN ISO 5211 126
Couplings (standard), square bore according to EN ISO 5211 128

Output drive types

5. Dimensions
Dimensions Valve attachments for actuators and gearboxes

EN ISO 5210/EN ISO 5211/DIN 3210/DIN 3338

Comparison between EN ISO 5210/EN ISO 5211 and DIN 3210/DIN 3338
EN ISO 5210 Multi-turn valve actuator attachments
EN ISO 5211 Part-turn actuator attachments
DIN 3210 Output drives of electric actuators for valves (withdrawn)
DIN 3338 Multi-turn actuator attachments, type C

Actuator
h1

(d3) (d3)
Ø d4 Ø d2 Ø d2 Ø d4
Designations deviating from EN ISO
Ø d3 (k) Ø d3 (k)
Ø d1 Ø d1 are indicated in brackets

Flange abbreviation Dimensions (in mm) Quantity of

screws and bolts
EN ISO EN ISO DIN EN ISO DIN EN ISO DIN EN ISO DIN EN ISO DIN ENI ISO DIN EN ISO DIN
5210 5211 3210 5210 3210 5210 3210 5210 3210 5210 3210 5210 3210 5210 3210
5211 5211 5211 5211 5211 5211
DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN
3338 3338 3338 3338 3338 3338 3338
Ø d1 Ø d1 Ø d2 Ø d2 Ø d3 (k) Ø d4 (d3) h1 max. h1 max.
– F03 – 46 – 25 – 36 – M5 – 3 – 4 –
– F04 – 54 – 30 – 42 – M5 – 3 – 4 –
F05 F05 – 65 – 35 – 50 – M6 – 3 – 4 –
F07 F07 – 90 – 55 – 70 – M8 – 3 – 4 –
F10 F10 G0 125 125 70 1) 60 1) 102 102 M10 M10 3 3 4 4
F12 F12 – 150 – 85 – 125 – M12 – 3 – 4 –
F14 F14 G1/2 175 175 100 100 140 140 M16 M16 4 4 4 4
F16 F16 G3 210 210 130 130 165 165 M20 M20 5 5 4 4
F25 F25 G4 300 300 200 1) 160 1) 254 254 M16 M16 5 5 8 8
F30 F30 G5 350 350 230 1)
180 1)
298 1)
300 1)
M20 M20 5 5 8 8
F35 F35 G6 415 1) 410 1) 260 1) 220 1) 356 356 M30 M30 5 5 8 8
F40 F40 G7 475 475 300 1) 230 1) 406 406 M36 M36 8 8 8 8
F48 F48 – 560 – 370 – 483 – M36 – 8 – 12 –
F60 F60 – 686 – 470 – 603 – M36 – 8 – 20 –

1) Deviating dimensions between EN ISO 5210/EN ISO 5211/DIN 3338 and DIN 3210

Arrangement of bores for screws Ø d4 (d3)

EN ISO 5210 F05 – F16 F25 – F40 F48 F60

EN ISO 5211 F03 – F16 F25 – F40 F48 F60
DIN 3210 G0 – G3 G4 – G7 – –
DIN 3338 F07 – F16 F25 – F40 – –
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y000.023/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/2

Output drives for multi-turn actuators and gearboxes

EN ISO 5210/DIN 3210/DIN3338

Stem nut Designation Transmission Transmission Application

of a of a
EN ISO 5210 DIN 3210 DIN 3338 torque thrust

Threads
For rising,
non-rotating valve stem

A A – X X
Bore with keyway
Square bore
Hexagon bore
For rotating,
non-rising valve stem

Bore with keyway

B1 B

B2 – Driving of
– X – valve shaft
B3 E gearbox shaft

B4 –

Dog coupling

Driving of
C C C X – valve shaft
gearbox shaft

Shaft end

Driving of
D D – X – valve shaft
gearbox shaft

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y000.023/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 2/2

SG/SV/SQ/PF/GS/GHE/FQM

Dimensions Couplings (standard), bore with keyway according to DIN 6885-1

Detail X
X

Z
1) Thread with grub screw made of A2
2) Article number refers to
unbored version, KN, KS
3) Combined flange F05/F07 without spigot (standa d).
As an alternative an individual flange F07 can be o dered with spigot
Article Splined Ø d7 H8 b Parallel Grub screw 1)
Ø d7
Type ØD L4 M coupling Q key DIN Ø d9 1) L5 1) Z
no. 2) max. over to JS 9 ISO 4029
DIN 5480 6885-1
12 15 5 2.3 + 0.1 5 x 5 x ..
SG 03.3/SG 04.3
Z009.977 24.8 25 17 25x1x24 15 10 12 4 1.8 + 0.1 4 x 4 x .. M4 5 M4 x 4 6
ED 25 – ED 50
8 10 3 1.4 + 0.1 3 x 3 x ..
12 15 5 2.3 + 0.1 5 x 5 x ..
SG 04.2 Z009.992 24.8 35 17 25x1x24 15 10 12 4 1.8 + 0.1 4 x 4 x .. M4 8 M4 x 4 6
8 10 3 1.4 + 0.1 3 x 3 x ..
SGC/SGM 04.1/05.1
SVC/SVM 05.1 17 20 6 2.8 + 0.1 6 x 6 x ..
SG 05.2
SG 05.3
EQ 40 – EQ 150 Z010.132 31.75 35 20 32x1.25x24 20 12 17 5 2.3 + 0.1 5 x 5 x .. M4 8 M4 x 4 6
GS 50.3 F05
GHE 05.1
PF-Q80/150 10 12 4 1.8 + 0.1 4 x 4 x ..
PF-M25/50
SGC/SGM 07.1
SQ 05.2 – F05/F07 3) 22 25.4 8 3.3 + 0.2 8 x 7 x ..
SQ 07.2 – F05/F07 3)
SG 07.2
Z010.369 41.75 35 20 42x1.25x32 25.4 17 22 6 2.8 + 0.2 6 x 6 x .. M5 8 M5 x 5 7.5
EQ 40 – EQ 150 (IP68)
GHE 07.1
SVC/SVM 07.1/5 12 17 5 2.3 + 0.1 5 x 5 x ..
FQM 05.1/07.1 Z021.449
22 25.4 8 3.3 + 0.2 8 x 7 x ..
SG 05.1/SG 07.1 Z010.169 41.75 40 20 42x1.25x32 25.4 17 22 6 2.8 + 0.1 6 x 6 x .. M5 8 M5 x 5 7.5
12 17 5 2.3 + 0.1 5 x 5 x ..
22 25.4 8 3.3 + 0.2 8 x 7 x ..
SQ 07.2 – F10 Z010.658 41.75 60 20 42x1.25x32 25.4 17 22 6 2.8 + 0.1 6 x 6 x .. M5 8 M5 x 5 7.5
12 17 5 2.3 + 0.1 5 x 5 x ..
SGC/SGM 10.1
SQ 10.2 – F10 30 38 10 3.3 + 0.2 10 x 8 x ..
GS 50.3
GHE 10.1
Z010.302 51.75 45 30 52x1.25x40 38 22 30 8 3.3 + 0.2 8 x 7 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
SG 10.2
EQ 300/EQ 600
PF-Q300/600 17 22 6 2.8 + 0.1 6 x 6 x ..
PF-M100
30 38 10 3.3 + 0.2 10 x 8 x ..
SG 10.1 Z010.328 51.75 65 35 52x1.25x40 38 22 30 8 3.3 + 0.2 8 x 7 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
17 22 6 2.8 + 0.1 6 x 6 x ..
30 38 10 3.3 + 0.2 10 x 8 x ..
SQ 10.2 – F12 Z044.911 51.75 75 30 52x1.25x40 38 22 30 8 3.3 + 0.2 8 x 7 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
17 22 6 2.8 + 0.1 6 x 6 x ..
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F12 44 50 14 3.8 + 0.2 14 x 9 x ..
SQ 12.2 – F12
GS 63.3 Z010.368 67.6 55 40 68x2x32 50 38 44 12 3.3 + 0.2 12 x 8 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
GHE 12.1
FQM 10.1/12.1 Z021.415 30 38 10 3.3 + 0.2 10 x 8 x ..
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y001.039/003/en Issue 2.21 Page 1/2

SG/SV/SQ/PF/GS/GHE/FQM

Dimensions Couplings (standard), bore with keyway according to DIN 6885-1

Article Splined Ø d7 H8 b Parallel Grub screw 1)

Ø d7
Type ØD L4 M coupling Q key DIN Ø d9 1) L5 1) Z
no. 2) max. over to JS 9 ISO 4029
DIN 5480 6885-1
44 50 14 3.8 + 0.2 14 x 9 x ..
SG 12.1 Z010.184 67.6 75 40 68x2x32 50 38 44 12 3.3 + 0.2 12 x 8 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
30 38 10 3.3 + 0.2 10 x 8 x ..
44 50 14 3.8 + 0.2 14 x 9 x ..
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F14
Z006.070 67.6 95 40 68x2x32 50 38 44 12 3.3 + 0.2 12 x 8 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 12.2 – F14
30 38 10 3.3 + 0.2 10 x 8 x ..
44 50 14 3.8 + 0.2 14 x 9 x ..
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F16
Z006.071 67.6 105 40 68x2x32 50 38 44 12 3.3 + 0.2 12 x 8 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 12.2 – F16
30 38 10 3.3 + 0.2 10 x 8 x ..
SGM 14.1 – F14 58 60 18 4.4 + 0.2 18 x 11 x ..
SQ 14.2 – F14 Z010.394 81.6 65 47 82x2x40 60 50 58 16 4.3 + 0.2 16 x 10 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
GS 80.3 44 50 14 3.8 + 0.2 14 x 9 x ..
58 60 18 4.4 + 0.2 18 x 11 x ..
SGM 14.1 – F16
Z111.676 81.6 115 40 82x2x40 60 50 58 16 4.3 + 0.2 16 x 10 x .. M6 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 14.2 – F16
44 50 14 3.8 + 0.2 14 x 9 x ..
75 80 22 5.4 + 0.2 22 x 14 x ..
GS 100.3 Z015.955 105.8 80 50 106x2x52 80 65 75 20 4.9 + 0.2 20 x 12 x .. M8 18 M8 x 8 12
58 65 18 4.4 + 0.2 18 x 11 x ..
85 90 25 5.4 + 0.2 25 x 14 x ..
GS 125.3 Z017.441 119.6 110 70 120x2x60 90 75 85 22 5.4 + 0.2 22 x 14 x .. M8 18 M8 x 8 12
65 75 20 4.9 + 0.2 20 x 12 x ..

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y001.039/003/en Issue 2.21 Page 2/2

SG/SV/SQ/PF/GS/GHE/FQM

Dimensions Couplings (standard), two-flat bo e according to ISO 5211

L6
Detail X L51) 9 1)
X

d15
Z
1) Thread with grub screw made of A2
2) Article number refers to unbored version, KN, KS
3) DIN 475 M
4) Combined flange F05/F07 without spigot (standa d).
As an alternative an individual flange F07 can be o dered with spigot
Article Splined S H11 Ø d8 Grub screw 1)
Type ØD L4 M coupling over to L6 Ø d9 1) Ø d15 L5 1) Z
no. 2)
DIN 5480 max. ISO 4029

SG 03.3/SG 04.3 11 14.1

Z009.977 24.8 25 17 25x1x24 25 M4 16 5 M4 x 4 6
ED 25 – ED 50 11 14 18.1
11 14.1
SG 04.2 Z009.992 24.8 35 17 25x1x24 25 M4 16 8 M4 x 4 6
11 14 18.1
SGC/SGM 04.1/05.1
SVC/SVM 05.1 11 14.1 25 16
SG 05.2
SG 05.3
EQ 40 – EQ 150 Z010.132 31.75 35 20 32x1.25x24 11 16 3) 18 3) 25 M4 22.5 8 M4 x 4 6
GS 50.3 F05
GHE 05.1
PF-Q80/150 16 3) 17 22.2 30 25
PF-M25/50
SGC/SGM 07.1
SQ 05.2 – F05/F07 4)
11 16 3) 18 3) 25 22.5
SQ 07.2 – F05/F07 4)
SG 07.2 Z010.369
41.75 35 20 42x1.25x32 M5 8 M5 x 5 7.5
EQ 40 – EQ 150 (IP68)
GHE 07.1
16 3) 22 28.2 30 31
SVC/SVM 07.1/5
FQM 05.1/07.1 Z021.449
11 16 3) 18 3) 25 22.5
SG 05.1/SG 07.1 Z010.169 41.75 40 20 42x1.25x32 M5 8 M5 x 5 7.5
16 3)
22 28.2 30 31
11 16 3) 18 3) 25 22.5
SQ 07.2 – F10 Z010.658 41.75 60 20 42x1.25x32 M5 8 M5 x 5 7.5
16 3)
22 28.2 30 31
SGC/SGM 10.1
SQ 10.2 – F10 11 16 3) 18 3) 25 22.5
GS 50.3
GHE 10.1
Z010.302 51.75 45 30 52x1.25x40 16 3) 22 28.2 30 M6 31 10 M6 x 6 9
SG 10.2
EQ 300/EQ 600
PF-Q300/600 22 27 36.2 40 41
PF-M100
11 16 3) 18 3) 25 22.5
SG 10.1 Z010.328 51.75 65 35 52x1.25x40 16 3)
22 28.2 30 M6 31 10 M6 x 6 9
22 27 36.2 40 41
11 16 3) 18 3) 25 22.5
SQ 10.2 – F12 Z044.911 51.75 75 30 52x1.25x40 16 3)
22 28.2 30 M6 31 10 M6 x 6 9
22 27 36.2 40 41
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F12 16 3) 22 28.2 30 31
SQ 12.2 – F12
GS 63.3 Z010.368 67.6 55 40 68x2x32 22 27 36.2 40 M6 41 10 M6 x 6 9
GHE 12.1
FQM 10.1/12.1 Z021.415 27 36 (41 ) 48.2 (48 ) 45
3) 3)
53
16 3)
22 28.2 30 31
SG 12.1 Z010.184 67.6 75 40 68x2x32 22 27 36.2 40 M6 41 10 M6 x 6 9
27 36 (41 ) 48.2 (48 ) 45
3) 3)
53
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y001.040/003/en Issue 2.21 Page 1/2

SG/SV/SQ/PF/GS/GHE/FQM

Dimensions Couplings (standard), two-flat bo e according to ISO 5211

Article Splined S H11 Ø d8 Grub screw 1)

Type ØD L4 M coupling over to L6 Ø d9 1) Ø d15 L5 1) Z
no. 2)
DIN 5480 max. ISO 4029

16 3) 22 28.2 30 31
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F14
Z006.070 67.6 95 40 68x2x32 22 27 36.2 40 M6 41 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 12.2 – F14
27 36 (41 3)) 48.2 (48 3)) 45 53
16 3) 22 28.2 30 31
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F16
Z006.071 67.6 105 40 68x2x32 22 27 36.2 40 M6 41 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 12.2 – F16
27 36 (41 ) 48.2 (48 ) 45
3) 3)
53
SGM 14.1 – F14 22 27 36.2 40 41
SQ 14.2 – F14 Z010.394 81.6 65 47 82x2x40 27 36 (41 3)) 48.2 (48 3)) 45 M6 53 10 M6 x 6 9
GS 80.3 36 (41 3)) 46 60.2 59 64
22 27 36.2 40 41
SGM 14.1 – F16
Z111.676 81.6 115 40 82x2x40 27 36 (41 ) 48.2 (48 ) 45
3) 3)
M6 53 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 14.2 – F16
36 (41 3)) 46 60.2 59 64
27 36 (41 3)) 48.2 (48 3)) 45 53
GS 100.3 Z015.955 105.8 80 50 106x2x52 36 (41 ) 3)
46 60.2 59 M8 64 18 M8 x 8 12
46 55 72.2 77 85
36 (41 3)) 46 60.2 59 64
GS 125.3 Z017.441 119.6 110 70 120x2x60 46 55 72.2 77 M8 85 18 M8 x 8 12
55 75 98.2 94 95

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y001.040/003/en Issue 2.21 Page 2/2

SG/SV/SQ/PF/GS/GHE/FQM

Dimensions Couplings (standard), square bore according to ISO 5211

L
Detail X L 5 1)
X

∅
d15

d9
1)
Z
1) Thread with grub screw made of A2 M
2) Article number refers to unbored version, KN, KS
L
3) DIN 79
4) Combined flange F05/F07 without spigot (standa d).
As an alternative an individual flange F07 can be o dered with spigot
Article Splined S H11 Ø d8 Grub screw 1)
Type ØD L4 M coupling over to L6 Ø d9 1) Ø d15 L5 1) Z
no. 2)
DIN 5480 max. ISO 4029

SG 03.3/SG 04.3 11 14.1

Z009.977 24.8 25 17 25x1x24 25 M4 16 5 M4 x 4 6
ED 25 – ED 50 11 14 18.1
11 14.1
SG 04.2 Z009.992 24.8 35 17 25x1x24 30 M4 16 8 M4 x 4 6
11 14 18.1
SGC/SGM 04.1/05.1
SVC/SVM 05.1 11 14.1 16
SG 05.2
SG 05.3
EQ 40 – EQ 150 Z010.132 31.75 35 20 32x1.25x24 11 14 18.1 30 M4 20 8 M4 x 4 6
GS 50.3 F05
GHE 05.1
PF-Q80/150 14 17 22.2 24
PF-M25/50
SGC/SGM 07.1
SQ 05.2 – F05/F07 4) 11 14 18.1 20
SQ 07.2 – F05/F07 4)
SG 07.2
Z010.369 41.75 35 20 42x1.25x32 14 17 22.2 30 M5 24 8 M5 x 5 7.5
EQ 40 – EQ 150 (IP68)
GHE 07.1
SVC/SVM 07.1/5 17 22 28.2 31.5
FQM 05.1/07.1 Z021.449
11 14 18.1 20
SG 05.1/SG 07.1 Z010.169 41.75 40 20 42x1.25x32 14 17 22.2 30 M5 24 8 M5 x 5 7.5
17 22 28.2 31.5
11 14 18.1 20
SQ 07.2 – F10 Z010.658 41.75 60 20 42x1.25x32 14 17 22.2 30 M5 24 8 M5 x 5 7.5
17 22 28.2 31.5
SGC/SGM 10.1
SQ 10.2 – F10 14 17 22.2 30 24
GS 50.3
GHE 10.1
Z010.302 51.75 45 30 52x1.25x40 17 22 28.2 30 M6 31.5 10 M6 x 6 9
SG 10.2
EQ 300/EQ 600
PF-Q300/600 22 30 3) 40.2 3) 40 41.5
PF-M100
14 17 22.2 30 24
SG 10.1 Z010.328 51.75 65 35 52x1.25x40 17 22 28.2 30 M6 31.5 10 M6 x 6 9
22 30 3) 40.2 3) 40 41.5
14 17 22.2 30 24
SQ 10.2 – F12 Z044.911 51.75 75 30 52x1.25x40 17 22 28.2 30 M6 31.5 10 M6 x 6 9
22 30 3)
40.2 3)
40 41.5
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F12 17 22 28.2 30 31.5
SQ 12.2 – F12
GS 63.3 Z010.368 67.6 55 40 68x2x32 22 30 3) 40.2 3) 40 M6 41.5 10 M6 x 6 9
GHE 12.1
FQM 10.1/12.1 Z021.415 30 3) 36 48.2 50 50
We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y001.041/003/en Issue 2.21 Page 1/2

SG/SV/SQ/PF/GS/GHE/FQM

Dimensions Couplings (standard), square bore according to ISO 5211

Article Splined S H11 Ø d8 Grub screw 1)

Type ØD L4 M coupling over to L6 Ø d9 1) Ø d15 L5 1) Z
no. 2)
DIN 5480 max. ISO 4029

17 22 28.2 30 31.5
SG 12.1 Z010.184 67.6 75 40 68x2x32 22 30 3)
40.2 3)
40 M6 41.5 10 M6 x 6 9
30 3) 36 48.2 50 50
17 22 28.2 30 31.5
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F14
Z006.070 67.6 95 40 68x2x32 22 30 3) 40.2 3) 40 M6 41.5 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 12.2 – F14
30 3)
36 48.2 50 50
17 22 28.2 30 31.5
SGC/SGM 12.1 – F16
Z006.071 67.6 105 40 68x2x32 22 30 3) 40.2 3) 40 M6 41.5 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 12.2 – F16
30 3) 36 48.2 50 50
SGM 14.1 – F14 22 30 3) 40.2 3) 40 41.5
SQ 14.2 – F14 Z010.394 81.6 65 47 82x2x40 30 3)
36 48.2 50 M6 50 10 M6 x 6 9
GS 80.3 36 46 60.2 50 64
22 30 3) 40.2 3) 40 41.5
SGM 14.1 – F16
Z111.676 81.6 115 40 82x2x40 30 3)
36 48.2 50 M6 50 10 M6 x 6 9
SQ 14.2 – F16
36 46 60.2 50 64
30 3) 36 48.2 50 50
GS 100.3 Z015.955 105.8 80 50 106x2x52 36 46 60.2 50 M8 64 18 M8 x 8 12
46 55 72.2 60 82
36 46 60.2 50 64
GS 125.3 Z017.441 119.6 110 70 120x2x60 46 55 72.2 60 M8 82 18 M8 x 8 12
55 75 98.2 80 95

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y001.041/003/en Issue 2.21 Page 2/2

6 Spare parts lists

Smart Range
PF-M25 – PF-M100 132
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600 134

SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1 / SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1 136

SGC 12.1 138
SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1 / SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1 Fieldbus 140
SGC 12.1 Fieldbus 142

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5 / SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5 144

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5 / SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5 Fieldbus 146

6. Spare parts lists

 Spare parts list

PROFOX
PF-M25 – PF-M100

Y009.232/003/en
Issue 2.21
PF-M25 – PF-M100

Spare parts list PROFOX

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Only the designated spare parts with reference numbers
or spare parts sets for replacement are available for the customer. The are specified in the following list. The parts shown in the exploded view
without reference numbers may only be replaced by AUMA. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

006.0 Power supply unit
525.0 Coupling
541.0 Protective earth connection Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel with ball handle Sub-assembly
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
553.0 Mechanical position indicator1) Sub-assembly
553.1 Screw plug M40 Sub-assembly
612.0 Screw plug for end stop Sub-assembly
658.0 I/O board as option
659.0 Fieldbus boards (fieldbus and connection board) Sub-assembly
663.0 Screw plug for manual emergency operation2) Sub-assembly
663.0 Screw plug for cable gland Sub-assembly
664.0 Internal protective earth connection Sub-assembly
665.0 Cover for electronics housing Sub-assembly
666.0 Handwheel bearing flange Sub-assembly
670.0 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set

1) A special tool is required for disassembly/assembly of mechanical position indicator. This can be ordered from AUMA (parts number: V004.027-
02).
2) The manual emergency operation is only available for models PF-M5 and PF-M10, which are not equipped with a handwheel.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y009.232/003/en Issue 2.21

 Spare parts list

PROFOX
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Y008.952/003/en
Issue 2.21
PF-Q80 – PF-Q600

Spare parts list PROFOX

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Only the designated spare parts with reference numbers
or spare parts sets for replacement are available for the customer. The are specified in the following list. The parts shown in the exploded view
without reference numbers may only be replaced by AUMA. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

006.0 Power supply unit
525.0 Coupling
541.0 Protective earth connection Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel with ball handle Sub-assembly
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
553.0 Mechanical position indicator1) Sub-assembly
553.1 Screw plug M40 Sub-assembly
612.0 Screw plug for end stop Sub-assembly
658.0 I/O board as option
659.0 Fieldbus boards (fieldbus and connection board) Sub-assembly
663.0 Screw plug for manual emergency operation2) Sub-assembly
663.0 Screw plug for cable gland Sub-assembly
664.0 Internal protective earth connection Sub-assembly
665.0 Cover for electronics housing Sub-assembly
666.0 Handwheel bearing flange Sub-assembly
670.0 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set

1) A special tool is required for disassembly/assembly of mechanical position indicator. This can be ordered from AUMA (parts number: V004.027-
02).
2) The manual emergency operation is only available for models PF-Q20 and PF-Q40, which are not equipped with a handwheel.

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document. For further information on
the product, refer to www.auma.com.

Y008.952/003/en Issue 2.21

 Spare parts list

Part-turn actuators
SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1
SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1

Y004.979/003/en
Issue 1.17
SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1
SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1
Spare parts list Part-turn actuators

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from
actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

002.0-1 Local controls Sub-assembly
002.0-2 Cover (for version without local controls) Sub-assembly
002.0-3 Cover with socket for connecting separately mounted local controls Sub-assembly
002.3-1 Board for local controls 002.0-1 Sub-assembly
002.3-2 Board in connecting cover 002.0-3 Sub-assembly
006.0 Power supply unit/switchgear Sub-assembly
009.0 Logic board Sub-assembly
058.0 Wire for protective earth
500.0 Cover Sub-assembly
501.0 Socket carrier (complete with sockets) Sub-assembly
502.0 Pin carrier without pins Sub-assembly
503.0 Socket for control Sub-assembly
504.0 Socket for motor Sub-assembly
505.0 Pin for controls Sub-assembly
506.0 Pin for motor Sub-assembly
507.0 Cover for electrical connection Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
539.0 Screw plug
541.0 Protective earth connection Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel Sub-assembly
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
545.0-1 Protective cap with cord Sub-assembly
545.0-2 Protective cap without cord Sub-assembly
545.0-3 Mating plug Sub-assembly
587.0 Wall bracket
611.0 Cover Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit, small Set

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.979/003/en Issue 1.17

 Spare parts list

Part-turn actuators
SGC 12.1

Y006.454/003/en
Issue 1.17
SGC 12.1
Spare parts list Part-turn actuators

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from
actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

002.0-1 Local controls Sub-assembly
002.0-2 Cover (for version without local controls) Sub-assembly
002.0-3 Cover with socket for connecting separately mounted local controls Sub-assembly
002.3-1 Local controls board for 022.0-1 Sub-assembly
002.3-2 Board in connecting cover for 022.0-3 Sub-assembly
006.0 Power supply unit/switchgear
009.0 Logic board Sub-assembly
010.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
058.0 Wire for protective earth Sub-assembly
500.0 Cover Sub-assembly
501.0 Socket carrier (complete with sockets) Sub-assembly
502.0 Pin carrier without pins Sub-assembly
503.0 Socket for control Sub-assembly
504.0 Socket for motor Sub-assembly
505.0 Pin for controls Sub-assembly
506.0 Pin for motor Sub-assembly
507.0 Cover for electrical connection Sub-assembly
522.0 Flange Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
539.0 Screw plug
541.0 Protective earthing Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel Sub-assembly
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
545.0-1 Protective cap with cord Sub-assembly
545.0-2 Protective cap without cord Sub-assembly
545.0-3 Mating plug Sub-assembly
548.0 Spigot ring
587.0 Wall bracket
596.0 Output drive flange Sub-assembly
609.1 Angle adapter for mains cables Sub-assembly
610.1 Angle adapter for control contacts Sub-assembly
611.0 Cover Sub-assembly
612.0 Screw plug for end stop
S1 Seal kit, small Set

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.454/003/en Issue 1.17

 Spare parts list

Part-turn actuators
SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1
SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1
Fieldbus

Y004.980/003/en
Issue 1.17
SGC 04.1 – SGC 10.1
SGCR 04.1 – SGCR 10.1
Spare parts list Part-turn actuators Fieldbus

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from
actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

002.0-1 Local controls Sub-assembly
002.0-2 Cover (for version without local controls) Sub-assembly
002.0-3 Cover with socket for separately mounted local controls Sub-assembly
002.3-1 Board for local controls 002.0-1 Sub-assembly
002.3-2 Board in connecting cover 002.0-3 Sub-assembly
006.0 Power supply unit/switchgear Sub-assembly
009.0 Logic board
058.0 Wire for protective earth Sub-assembly
500.0 Cover Sub-assembly
501.0 Socket carrier (complete with sockets) Sub-assembly
502.0 Pin carrier without pins Sub-assembly
503.0 Socket for control Sub-assembly
504.0 Socket for motor Sub-assembly
505.0 Pin for controls Sub-assembly
506.0 Pin for motor Sub-assembly
507.0 Cover for electrical connection Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
544.0 Screw plug
541.0 Protective earth connection Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel Sub-assembly
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
545.0-1 Protective cap with cord Sub-assembly
545.0-2 Protective cap without cord Sub-assembly
545.0-3 Mating plug Sub-assembly
587.0 Wall bracket
611.0 Cover Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit, small Set

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.980/003/en Issue 1.17

 Spare parts list

Part-turn actuators
SGC 12.1
Fieldbus

Y006.455/003/en
Issue 1.17
SGC 12.1
Spare parts list Part-turn actuators Fieldbus

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from
actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

002.0-1 Local controls Sub-assembly
002.0-2 Cover (for version without local controls) Sub-assembly
002.0-3 Cover with socket for connecting separately mounted local controls Sub-assembly
002.3-1 Local controls board for 022.0-1 Sub-assembly
002.3-2 Board in connecting cover for 022.0-3 Sub-assembly
006.0 Power supply unit/switchgear
009.0 Logic board Sub-assembly
010.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
058.0 Wire for protective earth Sub-assembly
500.0 Cover Sub-assembly
501.0 Socket carrier (complete with sockets) Sub-assembly
502.0 Pin carrier without pins Sub-assembly
503.0 Socket for control Sub-assembly
504.0 Socket for motor Sub-assembly
505.0 Pin for controls Sub-assembly
506.0 Pin for motor Sub-assembly
507.0 Cover for electrical connection Sub-assembly
522.0 Flange Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
539.0 Screw plug
541.0 Protective earthing Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
545.0-1 Protective cap with cord Sub-assembly
545.0-2 Protective cap without cord Sub-assembly
545.0-3 Mating plug Sub-assembly
548.0 Spigot ring
587.0 Wall bracket
596.0 Output drive flange Sub-assembly
609.1 Angle adapter for mains cables Sub-assembly
610.1 Angle adapter for control contacts Sub-assembly
611.0 Cover Sub-assembly
612.0 Screw plug for end stop
S1 Seal kit, small Set

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y006.455/003/en Issue 1.17

 Spare parts list

Globe valve actuators

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5
SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5

Y004.977/003/en
Issue 1.17
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5
SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Spare parts list Globe valve actuators

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from
actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

002.0-1 Local controls Sub-assembly
002.0-2 Cover (for version without local controls) Sub-assembly
002.0-3 Cover with socket for separately mounted local controls Sub-assembly
002.3-1 Board for local controls 002.0-1 Sub-assembly
002.3-2 Board in connecting cover 002.0-3 Sub-assembly
006.0 Power supply unit/switchgear Sub-assembly
009.0 Logic board
058.0 Wire for protective earth Sub-assembly
500.0 Cover Sub-assembly
501.0 Socket carrier (complete with sockets) Sub-assembly
502.0 Pin carrier without pins Sub-assembly
503.0 Socket for control Sub-assembly
504.0 Socket for motor Sub-assembly
505.0 Pin for controls Sub-assembly
506.0 Pin for motor Sub-assembly
507.0 Cover for electrical connection Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
544.0 Screw plug
541.0 Protective earth connection Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel Sub-assembly
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
545.0-1 Protective cap with cord Sub-assembly
545.0-2 Protective cap without cord Sub-assembly
545.0-3 Mating plug Sub-assembly
587.0 Wall bracket
611.0 Cover Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit, small Set

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.977/003/en Issue 1.17

 Spare parts list

Globe valve actuators

SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5
SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Fieldbus

Y004.978/003/en
Issue 1.17
SVC 05.1 – SVC 07.5
SVCR 05.1 – SVCR 07.5
Spare parts list Globe valve actuators Fieldbus

Please state device type and our order number (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only original AUMA spare parts should be used.
Failure to use original spare parts voids the warranty and exempts AUMA from any liability. Representation of spare parts may slightly vary from
actual delivery.

Ref. no. Designation Type

002.0-1 Local controls Sub-assembly
002.0-2 Cover (for version without local controls) Sub-assembly
002.0-3 Cover with socket for separately mounted local controls Sub-assembly
002.3-1 Board for local controls 002.0-1 Sub-assembly
002.3-2 Board in connecting cover 002.0-3 Sub-assembly
006.0 Power supply unit/switchgear Sub-assembly
009.0 Logic board
058.0 Wire for protective earth Sub-assembly
500.0 Cover Sub-assembly
501.0 Socket carrier (complete with sockets) Sub-assembly
502.0 Pin carrier without pins Sub-assembly
503.0 Socket for control Sub-assembly
504.0 Socket for motor Sub-assembly
505.0 Pin for controls Sub-assembly
506.0 Pin for motor Sub-assembly
507.0 Cover for electrical connection Sub-assembly
525.0 Coupling Sub-assembly
544.0 Screw plug
541.0 Protective earth connection Sub-assembly
542.0 Handwheel Sub-assembly
542.1 Ball handle Sub-assembly
545.0-1 Protective cap with cord Sub-assembly
545.0-2 Protective cap without cord Sub-assembly
545.0-3 Mating plug Sub-assembly
587.0 Wall bracket
611.0 Cover Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit, small Set

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y004.978/003/en Issue 1.17

7 Wiring diagrams

Basic Range
Selection of wiring diagrams 150

Smart Range
Selection of wiring diagrams 156

7. Wiring diagrams
Basic Range

Wiring diagram selection

The short designations (D1 etc.) are descriptive numberings.

ED / DC 24 V
D1: 2 x limit switches
TPCL0AA60AA00AA00
EQ / 1-phase AC 230 V
D2: 2 x limit switches, 2 x torque switches
With heater 110 V – 250 V AC/DC
TPCL0AA00BA00BB00
EQ / Gleichstrom 24 V
D3: 2 x limit switches, 2 x torque switches
TPCL0AA00AA00AA00
EQ / 3-phase AC 400 V
D4: 4 x limit switches, 2 x torque switches
With internal reversing contactors, 24 V DC control voltage, 4 – 20 mA position feedback signal , heater, themal protec-
tion on customer connection
TPCL0AB10CE01CB00
EQ / 1-phase AC 230 V
D5 2 x limit switches, 2 x torque switches
With 4 – 20 mA position feedback signal
TPCL0AA00BD00BA00

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.557/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

Code: D1
Code: D2
Code: D3
Code: D4
Code: D5
Smart Range

Wiring diagram selection

The short designations (E1 etc.) are descriptive numberings.

SGC/SVC basic version (I/O) / open-close duty / 1-phase AC 115 V or 230 V

E1: 3 x binary inputs (24 V DC): OPEN, STOP, CLOSE
4 x binary outputs: OPEN, CLOSE, torque fault, REMOTE
Position feedback signal (0/4 – 20 mA)
Industrial plug TPCB-0E6-2C7-0530 TPA50R200-0A0-000
AUMA plug/socket TPCB-0E6-2C7-0000 TPA50R200-0A0-000
connector:
SGC/SVC basic version (I/O) / modulating duty / 1-phase AC 115 V or 230 V
E2: 4 x binary inputs (24 V DC): OPEN, STOP, CLOSE, MODE
4 x binary outputs: OPEN, CLOSE, torque fault, REMOTE
Position feedback signal (0/4 – 20 mA)
Positioner (0/4 – 20 mA)
Industrial plug TPCB-1H6-2C7-0530 TPA50R200-0A0-000
AUMA plug/socket TPCB-1H6-2C7-0000 TPA50R200-0A0-000
connector:
SGC/SVC Profibus DP / open-close duty and modulating duty / 1-phase AC 115 V or 230 V
E3: Position feedback signal and positioner
Industrial plug TPCBA000-2A7-0540 TPA50R200-0A0-000
AUMA plug/socket TPCBA000-2A7-0000 TPA50R200-0A0-000
connector:
SGC/SVC Modbus RTU / open-close duty and modulating duty / 1-phase AC 115 V or 230 V
E4: Position feedback signal and positioner
Industrial plug TPCBC000-2A7-0540 TPA50R200-0A0-000
AUMA plug/socket TPCBC000-2A7-0000 TPA50R200-0A0-000
connector:

PROFOX basic version (I/O) / open-close duty / 1-phase AC 110 V – 240 V/50/60 Hz
P1 3 x binary inputs (24 V DC): CLOSE, OPEN, STOP
3 x binary outputs: CLOSE, OPEN, failure
Position feedback signal (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V)
TPCP00A1A1A100000
PROFOX basic version (I/O) / modulating duty / 1-phase AC 110 V – 240 V/50/60 Hz
P2 3 x binary inputs (24 V DC): CLOSE, OPEN, STOP
3 x binary outputs: CLOSE, OPEN, failure
Analog input for position (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V)
Position feedback signal (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V)
TPCP00A1B1A100000
PROFOX basic version Profibus DP / open-close duty and modulating duty / 1-phase AC 110 V – 240 V/50/60 Hz
P3 3 x binary inputs (24 V DC): CLOSE, OPEN, STOP
3 x binary outputs: CLOSE, OPEN, failure
Position feedback signal (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V)
Profibus DP-V0, IN and OUT
TPCPA0B1A1A100000
PROFOX basic version Modbus RTU / open-close duty and modulating duty / 1-phase AC 110 V – 240 V/50/60 Hz
P4 3 x binary inputs (24 V DC): CLOSE, OPEN, STOP
3 x binary outputs: CLOSE, OPEN, failure
Position feedback signal (0/4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 V)
Modbus RTU, IN and OUT
TPCPC0B1A1A100000

We reserve the right to alter data according to improvements made. Previous documents become invalid with the issue of this document.

Y007.558/003/en Issue 1.21 Page 1/1

Code: E1
Code: E1
Code: E2
Code: E2
Code: E3
Code: E3
Code: E4
Code: E4
Code: P1
Code: P2
Code: P3
Code: P4
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
Aumastr. 1
79379 Muellheim, Germany
Tel +49 7631-809-0
[email protected]

AUMA subsidiaries or representatives

are implanted in more than 70 countries. For
detailed contact information, please refer to
www.auma.com

Subject to changes without notice. The product features and technical data provided do not express or imply any warranty. Y007.568/003/en/1.22